1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
42 % for customized page headers/footers
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
45 % change header rule width
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
55 \use_default_options false
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
62 \language_package default
67 \font_typewriter default
69 \font_default_family default
70 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \default_output_format default
78 \bibtex_command default
79 \index_command default
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
99 \use_package amsmath 1
100 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package cancel 0
103 \use_package mathdots 1
104 \use_package mathtools 0
105 \use_package mhchem 1
106 \use_package stackrel 0
107 \use_package stmaryrd 0
108 \use_package undertilde 0
110 \cite_engine_type numerical
114 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation indent
136 \paragraph_indentation default
137 \quotes_language english
140 \paperpagestyle default
141 \tracking_changes true
142 \output_changes false
146 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
148 \author 2090807402 "usti"
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
168 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Note Note
190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
191 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
192 \begin_inset Newline newline
197 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
205 \begin_layout Standard
206 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
207 LatexCommand tableofcontents
214 \begin_layout Chapter
218 \begin_layout Section
222 \begin_layout Standard
223 LyX is a document preparation system.
224 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
225 scripts, publishable books, business
226 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
227 It is unlike most other
228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
235 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
237 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
253 pt type, left justified, 5
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
282 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
283 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
284 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
290 manual describes that, too.
293 \begin_layout Section
297 \begin_layout Standard
298 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
300 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
301 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
307 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
308 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
310 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
311 only a vertical scrollbar.
312 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
313 The first case is large images.
314 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
315 image and use the option
321 LaTeX and LyX options
324 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
326 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
327 this doesn't work for equations yet.
330 \begin_layout Standard
331 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
339 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
346 \begin_layout Section
350 \begin_layout Standard
351 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
352 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
353 Just select the manual you want to read from the
360 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
364 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
374 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
378 \begin_inset Index idx
381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
387 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
388 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
389 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
391 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
392 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
397 \begin_inset space \space{}
400 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
401 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
403 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
407 \begin_inset Index idx
410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
411 Reconfiguration of LyX
416 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
419 \begin_layout Section
421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
423 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
430 \begin_layout Standard
431 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
432 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
434 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
435 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
439 \begin_layout Standard
440 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
442 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
443 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
446 \begin_layout Standard
447 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
448 you can view from the menu
450 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
469 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
470 reconfigure LyX (menu
472 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
476 \begin_inset Note Note
479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
480 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
488 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
489 More about TeX Code is described in section
494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
496 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
500 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
507 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
517 \begin_inset Index idx
520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
521 Reconfiguration of LyX
526 See section 5.1 of the
530 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
533 \begin_layout Chapter
537 \begin_layout Section
538 Basic File Operations
539 \begin_inset Index idx
542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
551 \begin_layout Standard
556 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
557 in addition to some more advanced operations:
560 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
586 \begin_layout Itemize
598 \begin_layout Itemize
604 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
668 arg "dialog-show print"
674 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Standard
681 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
682 a few minor differences.
685 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
696 command lists the available templates.
697 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
698 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
699 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
707 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
714 \begin_layout Standard
715 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
747 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
748 space is just that — a big, blank space.
756 \begin_layout Standard
777 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
782 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
784 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
802 will reload the document from disk.
803 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
804 and want to restore it to the last save.
813 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
814 them as your changes.
817 \begin_layout Section
818 Basic Editing Features
819 \begin_inset Index idx
822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
831 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
838 \begin_layout Standard
839 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
840 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
841 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
842 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
844 We will start with cut and paste.
847 \begin_layout Standard
848 As you might expect, the
852 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
853 various other editing features.
854 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
858 \begin_layout Itemize
872 \begin_layout Itemize
886 \begin_layout Itemize
900 \begin_layout Itemize
910 \begin_layout Itemize
920 \begin_layout Itemize
936 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
942 \begin_layout Standard
943 The first three are self-explanatory.
945 \begin_inset Index idx
948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
954 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
963 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
966 \begin_layout Standard
969 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
974 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
989 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
991 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
1000 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
1001 will start a new paragraph.
1004 \begin_layout Standard
1005 \begin_inset Index idx
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1015 \begin_inset Index idx
1018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1026 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset space ~
1040 \begin_inset space ~
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1050 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1055 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1058 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_inset space ~
1072 button to skip the current word.
1076 \begin_inset space ~
1081 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1085 \begin_inset space ~
1090 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1092 If the toggle is set, searching for
1093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1104 will not match the word
1105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1119 Match whole words only
1121 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1150 LyX offers also an advanced
1153 \begin_inset space ~
1157 \begin_inset space ~
1162 feature that is described in sec.
1163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1169 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1176 \begin_layout Standard
1177 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1178 \begin_inset space \space{}
1182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1190 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1192 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1197 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1204 \begin_layout Standard
1205 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1208 arg "inset-select-all"
1214 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1217 selects the whole document.
1220 \begin_layout Section
1222 \begin_inset Index idx
1225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1232 \begin_inset Index idx
1235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1244 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1251 \begin_layout Standard
1252 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1253 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1256 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1259 or the toolbar button
1265 to undo some mistake.
1266 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1268 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1271 or the toolbar button
1278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1285 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1289 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1292 \begin_layout Standard
1293 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1302 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1303 This is a consequence of the 100
1304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1307 step undo limit mentioned above.
1310 \begin_layout Standard
1319 work on almost everything in LyX.
1320 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1324 \begin_layout Section
1326 \begin_inset Index idx
1329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1338 \begin_layout Standard
1339 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1342 \begin_layout Enumerate
1347 \begin_layout Itemize
1352 once anywhere in the edit window.
1353 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1357 \begin_layout Enumerate
1362 \begin_layout Itemize
1368 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1374 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1377 \begin_layout Itemize
1378 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1380 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1387 \begin_layout Enumerate
1388 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1394 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1398 \begin_layout Section
1400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1402 name "sec:Navigating"
1407 \begin_inset Index idx
1410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1419 \begin_layout Standard
1420 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1423 \begin_layout Itemize
1428 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1429 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1432 \begin_layout Itemize
1433 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1435 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1438 or by the toolbar button
1441 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1447 \begin_layout Itemize
1448 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1450 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1453 and use the same menu to return to them.
1454 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1457 \begin_layout Standard
1461 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1466 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1467 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1474 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1475 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1476 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1477 your last editing position.
1480 \begin_layout Standard
1485 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1488 \begin_layout Subsection
1490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1492 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1499 \begin_layout Standard
1500 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1501 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1502 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1510 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1514 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1521 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1526 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1532 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1533 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1534 dialog and to modify the citation.
1537 \begin_layout Standard
1538 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1540 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1541 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1549 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1552 \begin_layout Standard
1553 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1554 you further to control the display.
1559 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1560 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1566 option keeps it in the current view state.
1567 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1568 \begin_inset space ~
1571 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1572 \begin_inset space ~
1575 3, the subsections of sections
1576 \begin_inset space ~
1579 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1584 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1585 \begin_inset space ~
1589 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1599 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1602 \begin_layout Standard
1604 \begin_inset space \space{}
1608 \begin_inset Graphics
1609 filename ../images/reload.png
1614 \begin_inset space ~
1617 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1618 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1621 \begin_inset space \space{}
1625 \begin_inset Graphics
1626 filename ../images/down.png
1628 groupId toolbarbuttons
1633 \begin_inset space ~
1637 \begin_inset space \space{}
1641 \begin_inset Graphics
1642 filename ../images/up.png
1644 groupId toolbarbuttons
1649 \begin_inset space ~
1652 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1653 So, for example, you can move section
1654 \begin_inset space ~
1658 \begin_inset space ~
1661 2.4 or after section
1662 \begin_inset space ~
1666 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1668 \begin_inset Graphics
1669 filename ../images/promote.png
1671 groupId toolbarbuttons
1676 \begin_inset Graphics
1677 filename ../images/demote.png
1679 groupId toolbarbuttons
1683 (or the corresponding key bindings
1691 ) you can change the level of sections.
1692 So you can for example make section
1693 \begin_inset space ~
1697 \begin_inset space ~
1701 \begin_inset space ~
1707 \begin_layout Section
1708 Input/Word Completion
1709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1711 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1716 \begin_inset Index idx
1719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1726 \begin_inset Index idx
1729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1760 \begin_layout Standard
1761 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1763 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1764 is used to propose completions.
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1768 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1770 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1775 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset space ~
1791 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1795 \begin_inset space ~
1800 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1801 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1805 \begin_inset space ~
1811 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1812 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
1817 are completions available.
1822 key to accept a proposed completion.
1823 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1824 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1825 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1832 \begin_layout Standard
1833 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1834 ing options for text.
1835 The special math option
1839 enables characters to be composed.
1840 If, for example, you want to insert the character
1841 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
1844 , you can then input the characters
1845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1856 to a formula to get it.
1857 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
1858 of the math toolbar.
1859 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
1863 that is in LyX's installation folder.
1864 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
1873 \begin_layout Section
1875 \begin_inset Index idx
1878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1885 \begin_inset Index idx
1888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1917 \begin_inset Index idx
1920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 \begin_layout Standard
1952 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
1965 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
1967 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1971 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1978 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
1985 \begin_layout Standard
1989 \begin_inset space ~
1997 \begin_inset space ~
2018 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2022 \begin_layout Labeling
2023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2027 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2028 LatexCommand nomenclature
2030 description "Tabulator key"
2036 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2037 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2044 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2051 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2055 , especially section
2056 \begin_inset space ~
2060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2062 reference "sub:Lists"
2068 If you're still confused, look in the
2073 \begin_inset Newline newline
2080 key is only used to accept proposed input completions or to move the cursor
2081 in tables or math matrices.
2084 \begin_layout Labeling
2085 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2089 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2090 LatexCommand nomenclature
2092 description "Escape key"
2099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2106 It's used, generically, to cancel operations.
2107 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2110 \begin_layout Labeling
2111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2117 \begin_inset space ~
2121 \begin_inset space ~
2128 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2129 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2133 \begin_layout Standard
2134 There are three modifier keys:
2137 \begin_layout Labeling
2138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2156 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2157 LatexCommand nomenclature
2159 description "Control key"
2163 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2164 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2168 \begin_layout Itemize
2177 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2180 \begin_layout Itemize
2189 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2192 \begin_layout Itemize
2201 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2205 \begin_layout Labeling
2206 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2224 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2225 LatexCommand nomenclature
2227 description "Shift key"
2231 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2232 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2235 \begin_layout Labeling
2236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2254 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2255 LatexCommand nomenclature
2257 description "Alt or Meta key"
2261 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2262 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2263 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2269 \begin_inset Newline newline
2272 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2274 menu accelerator keys
2277 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2278 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2282 \begin_layout Standard
2283 For example, the sequence
2284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2290 \begin_inset space ~
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2300 \begin_inset space ~
2308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2327 \begin_inset space ~
2333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2343 \begin_layout Standard
2348 manual lists all other things bound to the
2356 \begin_layout Standard
2357 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2358 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2359 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2360 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2361 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2362 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2363 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2365 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2381 followed by a capital
2388 \begin_layout Chapter
2390 \begin_inset Index idx
2393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2402 \begin_layout Section
2404 \begin_inset Index idx
2407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2416 \begin_layout Subsection
2420 \begin_layout Standard
2421 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2422 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2423 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2424 numbering schemes, and so on.
2425 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2426 and format the title of your document differently.
2429 \begin_layout Standard
2434 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2435 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2436 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2437 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2438 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2441 \begin_layout Subsection
2443 \begin_inset Index idx
2446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2455 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2462 \begin_layout Standard
2463 You can select a class using the
2465 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2466 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2470 \begin_inset Index idx
2473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2480 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2488 \begin_layout Standard
2489 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2493 \begin_layout Description
2494 Article for basic articles
2497 \begin_layout Description
2498 Report for basic reports
2501 \begin_layout Description
2502 Book for writing a book
2505 \begin_layout Description
2506 Letter for US-style letters
2509 \begin_layout Standard
2510 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2511 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2512 will include many of these.
2513 Here are some of the classes.
2514 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2516 Special Document Classes
2525 \begin_layout Description
2526 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2529 \begin_layout Description
2530 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2534 \begin_layout Description
2535 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2539 \begin_layout Description
2540 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2541 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2542 There are three article layouts available.
2543 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2544 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2545 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2546 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2551 sequential numbering
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2555 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2556 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2557 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2558 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2561 \begin_layout Description
2562 Beamer Layout for presentations
2565 \begin_layout Description
2566 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2567 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2571 \begin_layout Description
2572 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2575 \begin_layout Description
2577 \begin_inset space ~
2580 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2583 \begin_layout Description
2584 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2587 \begin_layout Description
2588 Foils Used to make transparencies
2591 \begin_layout Description
2592 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2593 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2597 \begin_layout Description
2598 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2599 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2602 \begin_layout Description
2603 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2606 \begin_layout Description
2607 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2610 \begin_layout Description
2611 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2612 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2613 (Is used by this document.)
2616 \begin_layout Description
2617 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2620 \begin_layout Description
2621 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2624 \begin_layout Description
2629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2636 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2637 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2639 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2642 \begin_layout Description
2643 Slides Used to make transparencies
2646 \begin_layout Description
2648 \begin_inset space ~
2651 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2652 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2655 \begin_layout Description
2656 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2659 \begin_layout Standard
2660 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2662 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2668 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2669 of the document classes.
2672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2676 \begin_layout Standard
2677 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2679 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2680 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2682 \begin_inset Index idx
2685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2702 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2703 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2705 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2708 \begin_layout Standard
2710 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2711 and some of them, like
2715 , are highly specialized.
2716 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2717 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2719 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2720 by some document class.
2721 There are just too many of them.
2722 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2725 \begin_layout Standard
2726 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2734 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2735 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2736 document class for a new file.
2737 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2742 Installing new LaTeX files
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2750 manual for information on how to install them.
2751 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2757 \begin_layout Standard
2758 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2759 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2761 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2762 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2763 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2765 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2768 \begin_inset space ~
2775 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2787 \begin_inset Index idx
2790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2799 \begin_layout Standard
2800 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2801 chosen document class.
2802 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2803 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2810 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2814 \begin_inset Index idx
2817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2824 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
2828 \begin_layout Standard
2829 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
2830 always installed by default.
2831 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
2832 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
2833 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
2834 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
2835 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
2836 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
2837 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
2840 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2848 Reconfiguration of LyX
2854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2857 Installing new LaTeX files
2858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2865 manual for more information on installing required packages.
2868 \begin_layout Standard
2869 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
2872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2877 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
2878 LyX will advise you about these things.
2886 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2890 name "sub:Local-Layout"
2895 \begin_inset Index idx
2898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2899 Document ! Local Layout
2907 \begin_layout Standard
2908 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
2909 used in a variety of different documents.
2910 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
2911 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
2912 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
2913 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
2914 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
2915 What you want is LyX's
2916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2932 manual for information on how to use it.
2935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2939 \begin_layout Standard
2940 Each class has a default set of options.
2941 Here's a quick table describing them:
2944 \begin_layout Standard
2945 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2953 \begin_inset Tabular
2954 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
2955 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
2956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2960 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3414 \begin_layout Standard
3415 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3421 \begin_layout Standard
3422 You're probably also wondering what
3423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3427 \begin_inset space ~
3431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3435 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3436 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3441 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3446 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3456 headings, there are also
3464 headings, and so on.
3465 We will describe these headings fully in section
3466 \begin_inset space ~
3470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3472 reference "sub:Headings"
3479 \begin_layout Subsection
3481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3483 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3488 \begin_inset Index idx
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3500 \begin_inset Index idx
3503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 \begin_layout Standard
3513 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3515 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3522 \begin_inset space ~
3530 \begin_inset space ~
3535 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3537 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3538 to use for your document.
3539 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3543 \begin_layout Standard
3547 \begin_inset space ~
3554 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3560 \begin_inset space ~
3565 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3566 You can choose between the following five options:
3569 \begin_layout Labeling
3570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3575 Use default page style of current class.
3578 \begin_layout Labeling
3579 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3584 No page numbers or headings.
3587 \begin_layout Labeling
3588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3596 \begin_layout Labeling
3597 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3602 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3603 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3604 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3607 \begin_layout Labeling
3608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3613 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3614 have the LaTeX-package
3619 \begin_inset Index idx
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3629 How they are defined is explained in section
3630 \begin_inset space ~
3634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3636 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3643 \begin_layout Standard
3644 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3645 \begin_inset space ~
3649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3651 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3658 \begin_layout Subsection
3659 Paper Size and Orientation
3660 \begin_inset Index idx
3663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 Document ! Paper size
3670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3672 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3679 \begin_layout Standard
3680 You can find the following options in the menu
3683 \begin_inset space ~
3690 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3696 \begin_inset Index idx
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3708 \begin_layout Labeling
3709 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3713 \begin_inset space ~
3718 What size paper to print on.
3723 \begin_layout Itemize
3729 \begin_layout Itemize
3735 \begin_layout Itemize
3741 \begin_layout Itemize
3747 \begin_layout Itemize
3750 US letter, US legal, US executive
3753 \begin_layout Itemize
3759 \begin_layout Itemize
3766 \begin_layout Labeling
3767 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3772 To choose whether to output as
3783 \begin_layout Labeling
3784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3788 \begin_inset space ~
3793 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3794 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3797 \begin_layout Subsection
3799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3806 \begin_inset Index idx
3809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3816 \begin_inset Index idx
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3828 \begin_layout Standard
3829 Paper margins are set in the menu
3831 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3835 \begin_inset Index idx
3838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3847 \begin_layout Standard
3848 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3849 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3850 the paper format and the font size into account.
3853 \begin_layout Subsection
3857 \begin_layout Standard
3858 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
3863 That includes the paragraph environments.
3864 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3865 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3866 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
3867 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3876 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3878 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3879 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3880 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3883 \begin_layout Section
3884 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
3885 \begin_inset Index idx
3888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3889 Paragraph ! Indentation
3897 \begin_layout Subsection
3899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3901 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3908 \begin_layout Standard
3909 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3910 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3913 \begin_layout Standard
3914 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3915 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3916 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3917 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3921 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
3927 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
3928 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
3929 language than English.
3930 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
3934 \begin_layout Standard
3935 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
3936 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
3938 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
3939 LyX takes care of that.
3940 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
3942 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
3943 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
3944 of a page, and so on.
3948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
3954 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
3955 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
3959 these pre-coded spacings.
3960 We will explain more later.
3963 \begin_layout Subsection
3964 Paragraph Separation
3965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3967 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3972 \begin_inset Index idx
3975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3976 Paragraph ! Separation
3984 \begin_layout Standard
3992 \begin_inset space ~
4000 \begin_inset space ~
4007 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset Index idx
4014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4020 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4023 \begin_layout Subsection
4027 \begin_layout Standard
4028 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4031 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4033 \begin_inset space ~
4038 dialog and toggle the
4041 \begin_inset space ~
4046 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4049 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4053 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4054 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4058 \begin_layout Standard
4059 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4060 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4063 \begin_layout Subsection
4065 \begin_inset Index idx
4068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4069 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4077 \begin_layout Standard
4080 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4084 \begin_inset Index idx
4087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4096 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4110 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4124 installed to use this feature.
4129 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4131 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4133 \begin_inset space ~
4138 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4139 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4142 \begin_layout Section
4143 Paragraph Environments
4144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4146 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4151 \begin_inset Index idx
4154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4155 Paragraph ! Environments
4161 \begin_inset Index idx
4164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4165 Paragraph environments|(
4173 \begin_layout Subsection
4177 \begin_layout Standard
4178 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4181 \begin_layout Standard
4200 \begin_inset Newline newline
4203 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4204 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4205 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4214 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4217 \begin_layout Standard
4218 A paragraph environment is simply a
4219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4226 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4227 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4228 scheme, labels, and so on.
4229 Additionally, you can
4230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4237 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4238 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4239 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4240 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4242 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4244 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4247 \begin_layout Standard
4248 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4249 \begin_inset Graphics
4250 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4256 at the left end of the toolbar.
4257 LyX will change the environment of the
4261 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4262 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4263 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4276 create a new paragraph using the
4280 paragraph environment.
4282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4289 because if you are in one of these environments:
4292 \begin_layout Itemize
4298 \begin_layout Itemize
4304 \begin_layout Itemize
4310 \begin_layout Itemize
4316 \begin_layout Itemize
4322 \begin_layout Itemize
4328 \begin_layout Itemize
4334 \begin_layout Standard
4335 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4339 , rather than resetting it to
4344 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4345 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4351 reference "sec:Nesting"
4358 \begin_layout Subsection
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 The default paragraph environment is
4368 It creates a plain paragraph.
4369 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4370 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4371 this manual) are in the
4378 \begin_layout Standard
4379 You can nest a paragraph using the
4383 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4391 \begin_layout Subsection
4393 \begin_inset Index idx
4396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 \begin_layout Standard
4406 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4415 for thanks or contact information.
4416 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4417 page along with today's date.
4418 For other types of documents, the title
4419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4426 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4430 \begin_layout Standard
4431 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4445 Here's how you use them:
4448 \begin_layout Itemize
4449 Put the title of your document in the
4456 \begin_layout Itemize
4457 Put the author name in the
4464 \begin_layout Itemize
4465 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4466 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4472 Note that using this environment is optional.
4473 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4474 If you don't want a date, use the option
4476 Suppress default date on front page
4480 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4481 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4483 \begin_inset space ~
4491 \begin_layout Standard
4492 You can use footnotes to insert
4493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4500 or contact information.
4503 \begin_layout Subsection
4505 \begin_inset Index idx
4508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4524 \begin_layout Standard
4525 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4526 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4531 \begin_inset Index idx
4534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4535 Section headings ! Numbered
4543 \begin_layout Standard
4544 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4548 \begin_layout Enumerate
4554 \begin_layout Enumerate
4560 \begin_layout Enumerate
4566 \begin_layout Enumerate
4572 \begin_layout Enumerate
4578 \begin_layout Enumerate
4584 \begin_layout Enumerate
4590 \begin_layout Standard
4591 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4592 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4593 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4596 \begin_layout Standard
4597 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4598 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4599 You group the book into chapters.
4600 LyX does a similar grouping:
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4608 is divided into either
4619 \begin_layout Itemize
4631 \begin_layout Itemize
4643 \begin_layout Itemize
4655 \begin_layout Itemize
4667 \begin_layout Itemize
4679 \begin_layout Standard
4680 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4688 Not all document types use the
4692 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4697 is the top-level heading.
4705 \begin_layout Standard
4710 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4711 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4713 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4727 \begin_inset Index idx
4730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4731 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4739 \begin_layout Standard
4740 The unnumbered section headings have a
4741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4748 at the end of their name.
4749 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4750 the table of contents, see section
4751 \begin_inset space ~
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4765 Changing the Numbering
4766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4768 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4776 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4777 in the Table of Contents.
4778 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4780 Just as certain classes start with
4794 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4804 This is something you can change.
4807 \begin_layout Standard
4810 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4814 \begin_inset Index idx
4817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4826 \begin_inset space ~
4830 \begin_inset space ~
4835 you will see two counters.
4840 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
4842 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
4846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4847 Short Titles of Headings
4848 \begin_inset Index idx
4851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4852 Section headings ! Short titles
4858 \begin_inset Argument 1
4861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4870 name "sec:Short-Titles"
4877 \begin_layout Standard
4878 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
4879 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
4880 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
4881 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
4884 \begin_layout Standard
4885 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
4886 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
4887 avoiding the problem mentioned.
4888 To specify a short title, use the menu
4890 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4892 \begin_inset space ~
4898 This will insert a box labeled
4899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4914 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
4915 This also works for captions inside floats.
4918 \begin_layout Standard
4919 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
4922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4926 \begin_layout Standard
4927 The following information applies to all section headings:
4930 \begin_layout Itemize
4931 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4939 You can only use inline math in these environments.
4942 \begin_layout Itemize
4943 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
4946 \begin_layout Subsection
4947 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
4950 \begin_layout Standard
4951 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
4965 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
4966 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
4967 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
4968 the text they contain.
4969 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
4977 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
4980 \begin_layout Standard
4981 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
4990 when you start a new paragraph.
4991 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
4995 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
4996 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
4997 have to change back to the
5001 environment yourself.
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5021 \begin_inset Index idx
5024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5033 \begin_layout Standard
5034 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5035 time for the differences.
5044 are identical except for one difference:
5048 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5057 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5060 \begin_layout Standard
5061 Here's an example of the
5074 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5076 See – no indentation!
5080 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5081 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5082 the other paragraph.
5085 \begin_layout Standard
5086 Here's another example, this time in the
5093 \begin_layout Quotation
5099 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5100 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5101 the first line, then
5105 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5109 you were quoting other text.
5112 \begin_layout Quotation
5113 Here's a new paragraph.
5114 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5115 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5118 \begin_layout Standard
5119 As the examples show,
5123 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5124 They should put quotes in the
5129 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5133 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5142 \begin_inset Index idx
5145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5154 \begin_inset Index idx
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5173 \begin_layout Standard
5178 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5184 \begin_inset Newline newline
5187 Which I did not rehearse!
5191 It could be much worse.
5192 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5194 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5195 indented a bit more than the first.
5196 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5202 \begin_inset Newline newline
5205 And make things look fine
5206 \begin_inset Newline newline
5212 arg "newline-insert newline"
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5223 does not indent both margins.
5224 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5225 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5232 arg "newline-insert newline"
5238 \begin_layout Subsection
5240 \begin_inset Index idx
5243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5259 \begin_layout Standard
5260 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5270 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5279 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5280 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5281 describing some general features of all four of them.
5284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5289 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5291 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5300 reset the environment to
5304 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5305 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5306 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5310 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5314 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5321 \begin_layout Standard
5322 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5323 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5325 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5326 you read all of section
5327 \begin_inset space ~
5331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5333 reference "sec:Nesting"
5340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5346 \begin_inset Index idx
5349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5365 \begin_layout Standard
5366 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5370 paragraph environment.
5371 It has the following properties:
5374 \begin_layout Itemize
5375 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5379 \begin_layout Itemize
5380 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5383 \begin_layout Itemize
5384 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 The items can have any length.
5390 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5391 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
5403 environment inside another
5407 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
5421 \begin_inset space ~
5425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5427 reference "sec:Nesting"
5431 for a full explanation of nesting.
5435 \begin_layout Standard
5436 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5445 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5448 \begin_layout Standard
5449 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5450 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5453 \begin_layout Itemize
5454 The label for the first level
5458 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5462 \begin_layout Itemize
5463 The label for the second level is a dash.
5467 \begin_layout Itemize
5468 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5472 \begin_layout Itemize
5473 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5477 \begin_layout Itemize
5478 Back out to the third level.
5482 \begin_layout Itemize
5483 Back to the second level.
5487 \begin_layout Itemize
5488 Back to the outermost level.
5491 \begin_layout Standard
5492 These are the default labels for an
5497 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5499 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5502 dialog in the submenu
5507 \begin_inset Index idx
5510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5516 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5520 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5521 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5523 \begin_inset space ~
5527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5529 reference "sec:Nesting"
5536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5542 \begin_inset Index idx
5545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5554 name "sec:Enumerate"
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5566 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5567 It has these properties:
5570 \begin_layout Enumerate
5571 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5575 \begin_layout Enumerate
5576 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5580 \begin_layout Enumerate
5581 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5584 \begin_layout Enumerate
5589 environment resets the counter to one.
5592 \begin_layout Enumerate
5605 \begin_layout Enumerate
5606 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5607 Items can have any length.
5610 \begin_layout Enumerate
5611 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5614 \begin_layout Enumerate
5615 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5618 \begin_layout Enumerate
5619 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5623 \begin_layout Standard
5632 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5633 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5640 \begin_layout Enumerate
5641 The first level of an
5645 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5649 \begin_layout Enumerate
5650 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5654 \begin_layout Enumerate
5655 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5659 \begin_layout Enumerate
5660 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5663 \begin_layout Enumerate
5664 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5669 \begin_layout Enumerate
5670 Back to the third level
5674 \begin_layout Enumerate
5675 Back to the second level.
5679 \begin_layout Enumerate
5680 Back to the outermost level.
5683 \begin_layout Standard
5684 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5688 environment, see section
5689 \begin_inset space ~
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5695 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5700 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5703 \begin_layout Standard
5704 There is more to nesting
5708 environments than we've stated here.
5709 You should read section
5710 \begin_inset space ~
5714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5716 reference "sec:Nesting"
5720 to learn more about nesting.
5723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5729 \begin_inset Index idx
5732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5741 \begin_layout Standard
5742 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5746 list has no fixed label.
5747 Instead, LyX uses the first
5748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5755 of the first line as the label.
5759 \begin_layout Description
5760 Example: This is an example of the
5767 \begin_layout Standard
5768 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5772 \begin_layout Standard
5774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5781 it is meant that the first usage of the
5785 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5787 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5795 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
5800 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5801 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5803 \begin_inset space ~
5809 \begin_inset space ~
5813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5815 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
5819 for more information.) Here is an example:
5822 \begin_layout Description
5824 \begin_inset space ~
5827 Example: This one shows how to use a
5830 \begin_inset space ~
5842 \begin_layout Description
5843 Usage: You should use the
5847 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
5848 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
5850 It's not a good idea to use a
5854 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
5855 You're better off using
5867 paragraphs into them.
5870 \begin_layout Description
5871 Nesting: You can nest
5875 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
5879 \begin_layout Standard
5880 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
5881 them from the first line.
5884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5886 \begin_inset Index idx
5889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5898 \begin_layout Standard
5903 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
5906 \begin_layout Standard
5915 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
5917 Here are its properties:
5920 \begin_layout Labeling
5921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5923 \begin_inset space ~
5926 labels LyX uses the first
5927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5934 of each line as the item label.
5939 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
5940 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
5941 space as described above.
5944 \begin_layout Labeling
5945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5946 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
5947 the body of the item text.
5948 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
5949 label width plus a little extra space.
5953 \begin_layout Labeling
5954 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5956 \begin_inset space ~
5959 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
5961 If the label width is larger, the label
5962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5969 into the first line.
5970 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
5971 margin of the rest of the item text.
5974 \begin_layout Labeling
5975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5977 \begin_inset space ~
5980 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
5985 environment has the same left margin.
5986 \begin_inset Newline newline
5989 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
5992 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5994 \begin_inset space ~
5999 dialog (toolbar button
6002 arg "layout-paragraph"
6009 \begin_inset space ~
6014 determines the default label width.
6015 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6024 multiple times instead.
6025 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6034 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6037 \begin_inset space ~
6042 every time you alter a label in a
6047 \begin_inset Newline newline
6050 The predefined default width is the length of
6051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6059 \begin_inset space ~
6065 \begin_layout Standard
6070 list the same way as the
6074 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6080 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6089 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6090 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6092 \begin_inset space ~
6096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6098 reference "sec:Nesting"
6102 to learn about nesting.
6105 \begin_layout Standard
6106 There is yet another feature of the
6110 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6112 You can use additional
6116 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6121 are documented in section
6122 \begin_inset space ~
6126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6128 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6133 Here are some examples:
6136 \begin_layout Labeling
6137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6138 Left The default for
6145 \begin_layout Labeling
6146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6147 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6154 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6157 \begin_layout Labeling
6158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6159 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6163 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6170 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6173 \begin_layout Subsection
6175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6177 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6182 \begin_inset Index idx
6185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6194 \begin_layout Standard
6195 The features described in this section require that the module
6197 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6199 is loaded in the document settings.
6200 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6205 \begin_inset Index idx
6208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6209 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6218 Custom Enumerate Lists
6219 \begin_inset Index idx
6222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6223 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6233 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6236 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6239 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6240 There you add the command
6243 \begin_layout Standard
6251 \begin_layout Standard
6252 in TeX Code (shortcut
6262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6263 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6270 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6283 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6290 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6291 For capital Roman numerals replace
6303 in the command above.
6304 For Arabic numerals use
6312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6319 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6334 \begin_layout Standard
6336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6344 You can only number 26
6345 \begin_inset space ~
6348 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6356 \begin_layout Standard
6357 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6358 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6361 \begin_layout Standard
6362 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6365 \begin_layout Enumerate
6366 \begin_inset Argument 1
6369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6395 \begin_layout Enumerate
6396 \begin_inset Argument 1
6399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6422 \begin_layout Enumerate
6427 \begin_layout Enumerate
6428 \begin_inset Argument 1
6431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6455 \begin_layout Enumerate
6456 \begin_inset Argument 1
6459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6485 \begin_layout Standard
6486 For this list these commands were used:
6489 \begin_layout Standard
6500 \begin_inset Newline newline
6508 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 \begin_inset Newline newline
6526 \begin_layout Standard
6533 makes the label emphasized and
6542 \begin_layout Standard
6543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6551 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6552 lists until you change the definition.
6560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6562 \begin_inset Index idx
6565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6566 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6574 \begin_layout Standard
6575 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6578 \begin_layout Enumerate
6579 \begin_inset Argument 1
6582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6601 \begin_inset Note Note
6604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6605 goes back to default numbering
6613 \begin_layout Enumerate
6617 \begin_layout Standard
6621 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6625 \begin_layout Standard
6626 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6631 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6632 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6635 \begin_layout Standard
6636 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6644 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6652 \begin_layout Standard
6653 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6655 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6656 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6657 of a normal enumeration.
6658 There, insert the command
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6667 \begin_layout Standard
6672 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6676 \begin_layout Enumerate
6680 \begin_layout Enumerate
6684 \begin_layout Standard
6685 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6688 \begin_layout Enumerate
6689 \begin_inset Argument 1
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6708 This enumeration starts at 4
6711 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6713 \begin_inset Index idx
6716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6725 \begin_layout Standard
6726 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6728 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6731 \begin_layout Itemize
6735 \begin_layout Itemize
6736 with standard spacing
6739 \begin_layout Standard
6740 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6742 Add there the command
6746 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6749 \begin_layout Itemize
6750 \begin_inset Argument 1
6753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6772 \begin_layout Itemize
6776 \begin_layout Itemize
6780 \begin_layout Standard
6781 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6787 \begin_inset Index idx
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6791 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6797 For more information see its documentation,
6798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6808 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
6810 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
6811 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
6812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6815 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
6818 \begin_layout Enumerate
6819 \begin_inset Argument 1
6822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6830 parindent, labelsep=2cm
6843 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 with negative indentation
6847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6848 Further Customization
6849 \begin_inset Index idx
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 Lists ! Customization
6861 \begin_layout Standard
6862 You can also change the style of description lists.
6866 \begin_layout Standard
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6873 changes the description label font, the command
6876 \begin_layout Standard
6882 \begin_layout Standard
6883 sets the list style.
6886 \begin_layout Standard
6887 An example where the command
6890 \begin_layout Standard
6895 itshape, style=nextline
6898 \begin_layout Standard
6902 \begin_layout Description
6904 \begin_inset space ~
6908 \begin_inset Argument 1
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6917 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
6919 itshape, style=nextline
6929 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
6930 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
6934 \begin_layout Description
6936 \begin_inset space ~
6939 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
6940 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
6941 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
6944 \begin_layout Standard
6945 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
6951 \begin_inset Index idx
6954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6955 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6961 For more information see its documentation
6962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6971 \begin_layout Subsection
6973 \begin_inset Index idx
6976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6993 \begin_inset space ~
7001 \begin_layout Standard
7002 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7010 \begin_inset space ~
7016 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7017 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7018 In contrast, you can use the
7025 \begin_inset space ~
7030 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7031 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7035 \begin_layout Standard
7036 Of course, you're not limited to using
7043 \begin_inset space ~
7052 \begin_inset space ~
7057 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7058 some European academic papers.
7061 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7065 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7072 \begin_layout Standard
7077 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7078 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7082 \begin_inset space ~
7087 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7088 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7089 Here's an example of each:
7092 \begin_layout Right Address
7094 \begin_inset Newline newline
7098 \begin_inset Newline newline
7102 \begin_inset Newline newline
7105 When is it? What is today?
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7112 \begin_inset space ~
7118 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7119 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7120 Here's an example of the
7127 \begin_layout Address
7129 \begin_inset Newline newline
7132 Where do I send this
7133 \begin_inset Newline newline
7136 Your post office and country
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7140 As you can see, both
7147 \begin_inset space ~
7152 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7157 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7163 This makes sense, since
7171 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7172 Thus, you have to use
7179 arg "newline-insert newline"
7184 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7185 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7187 \begin_inset space ~
7191 \begin_inset space ~
7196 ) to start a new line in an
7203 \begin_inset space ~
7211 \begin_layout Subsection
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7217 or list of references.
7218 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7225 \begin_inset Index idx
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7237 \begin_layout Standard
7242 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7243 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7244 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7245 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7259 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7260 The book document classes ignores the
7264 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7268 in a letter document class.
7271 \begin_layout Standard
7276 environment does several things for you.
7277 First, it puts the centered label
7278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7286 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7288 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7289 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7290 the subsequent text.
7291 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7292 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7296 \begin_layout Standard
7297 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7301 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7302 The new paragraph will still be in the
7307 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7308 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7312 \begin_inset Float figure
7317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7319 \begin_inset Graphics
7320 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7328 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7333 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7355 We would love to demonstrate the
7359 environment, but since this document is in the
7360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7367 class, we can't do this.
7368 We inserted it therefore as figure
7369 \begin_inset space ~
7373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7375 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7380 If you have never heard of an
7381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7388 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7397 \begin_inset Index idx
7400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7409 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7416 \begin_layout Standard
7421 environment is used to list references.
7422 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7423 only use it at the end of the document.
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7436 When you first open a
7440 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7456 depending on the document class.
7457 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7458 Each paragraph of the
7462 environment is a bibliography entry.
7467 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7468 Each new paragraph is still in the
7475 \begin_layout Standard
7476 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7477 by using a BibTeX database.
7478 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7479 phy handling, have a look at section
7480 \begin_inset space ~
7484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7486 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7493 \begin_layout Subsection
7497 \begin_inset Index idx
7500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7501 Paragraph ! LyX code
7507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7516 \begin_layout Standard
7521 environment is another LyX extension.
7522 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7527 key as a fixed whitespace;
7531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_inset space ~
7548 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7553 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7554 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7557 arg "newline-insert newline"
7574 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7575 So, when you finish using the
7579 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7580 Also, you can nest the
7584 environment inside of others.
7587 \begin_layout Standard
7588 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7591 \begin_layout Itemize
7595 arg "newline-insert newline"
7598 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7603 \begin_inset space \space{}
7613 arg "newline-insert newline"
7619 \begin_layout Itemize
7623 arg "newline-insert newline"
7634 \begin_layout Itemize
7639 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7646 \begin_layout Itemize
7650 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7657 \begin_layout Itemize
7658 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7659 You must put at least one
7663 in any line you want blank.
7664 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7667 \begin_layout Itemize
7668 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7672 since that will insert
7677 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7680 arg "self-insert \""
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7690 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7694 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7698 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7702 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7706 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7707 printf("Hello World!
7712 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7716 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7721 This is just the standard
7722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7733 \begin_layout Standard
7738 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7739 rc-files, and so on.
7740 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7741 as if you used a typewriter.
7742 \begin_inset Index idx
7745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7746 Paragraph environments|)
7751 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7754 Program Code Listings
7759 \begin_inset space ~
7767 \begin_layout Section
7768 Nesting Environments
7769 \begin_inset Index idx
7772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7773 Nesting ! Environments
7779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7788 \begin_layout Subsection
7792 \begin_layout Standard
7793 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7795 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7797 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7799 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7811 \begin_layout Enumerate
7815 \begin_layout Enumerate
7820 \begin_layout Enumerate
7824 \begin_layout Enumerate
7829 \begin_layout Enumerate
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7834 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
7835 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
7837 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7839 \begin_inset space ~
7843 \begin_inset space ~
7851 \begin_inset space ~
7855 \begin_inset space ~
7860 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
7862 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
7865 arg "depth-increment"
7871 arg "depth-decrement"
7885 arg "depth-increment"
7891 arg "depth-decrement"
7895 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
7896 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
7900 \begin_layout Standard
7901 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
7902 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
7903 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
7904 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
7909 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
7911 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
7914 \begin_layout Subsection
7915 What You Can and Can't Nest
7918 \begin_layout Standard
7919 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
7920 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
7923 \begin_layout Standard
7924 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
7925 than a simple yes or no.
7926 There are three types of paragraph environments:
7929 \begin_layout Itemize
7930 Completely unnestable
7933 \begin_layout Itemize
7934 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
7938 \begin_layout Itemize
7939 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
7943 \begin_layout Standard
7944 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
7945 environments have them:
7948 \begin_layout Description
7949 Unnestable Can't nest them.
7950 Can't nest into them.
7954 \begin_layout Itemize
7960 \begin_layout Itemize
7966 \begin_layout Itemize
7972 \begin_layout Itemize
7978 \begin_layout Itemize
7985 \begin_layout Description
7987 \begin_inset space ~
7990 Nestable You can nest them.
7991 You can nest other things into them.
7995 \begin_layout Itemize
8001 \begin_layout Itemize
8007 \begin_layout Itemize
8013 \begin_layout Itemize
8019 \begin_layout Itemize
8025 \begin_layout Itemize
8031 \begin_layout Itemize
8037 \begin_layout Itemize
8044 \begin_layout Description
8045 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8046 You can't nest anything into them.
8050 \begin_layout Itemize
8056 \begin_layout Itemize
8062 \begin_layout Itemize
8068 \begin_layout Itemize
8074 \begin_layout Itemize
8080 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 \begin_layout Itemize
8092 \begin_layout Itemize
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 \begin_layout Itemize
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
8116 \begin_layout Itemize
8122 \begin_layout Itemize
8128 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 \begin_inset space ~
8138 \begin_layout Itemize
8145 \begin_layout Standard
8146 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8154 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8164 \begin_inset space ~
8167 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8168 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8169 nested section headings violate this.
8177 \begin_layout Subsection
8178 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8179 \begin_inset Index idx
8182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8183 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8192 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8193 affected by nesting anyhow.
8197 \begin_layout Itemize
8201 \begin_layout Itemize
8205 \begin_layout Itemize
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8211 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8219 Figures and tables in
8223 are not affected by this.
8228 Have a look at section
8229 \begin_inset space ~
8233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8235 reference "sec:Floats"
8239 for more information about
8246 \begin_layout Standard
8247 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8248 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8252 \begin_layout Standard
8253 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8261 of its own, it behaves just like a
8262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8269 paragraph environment.
8270 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8275 Here's an example with a table:
8278 \begin_layout Enumerate
8283 \begin_layout Enumerate
8284 This is (a) and it's nested.
8288 \begin_layout Standard
8289 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8295 \begin_layout Standard
8297 \begin_inset Tabular
8298 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8299 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8385 \begin_layout Standard
8386 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8393 \begin_layout Enumerate
8395 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8399 \begin_layout Enumerate
8403 \begin_layout Standard
8404 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8407 \begin_layout Enumerate
8412 \begin_layout Enumerate
8413 This is (a) and it's nested.
8417 \begin_layout Standard
8418 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8424 \begin_layout Standard
8426 \begin_inset Tabular
8427 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8428 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8429 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8514 \begin_layout Standard
8515 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8521 \begin_layout Enumerate
8528 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8531 \begin_layout Enumerate
8535 \begin_layout Standard
8536 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8543 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8546 \begin_layout Enumerate
8551 \begin_layout Enumerate
8552 This is (a) and it's nested.
8555 \begin_layout Standard
8556 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8564 \begin_inset Tabular
8565 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8566 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8653 \begin_layout Standard
8654 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8660 \begin_layout Enumerate
8662 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8669 \begin_layout Enumerate
8673 \begin_layout Standard
8674 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8680 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8681 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8685 \begin_layout Subsection
8686 Usage and General Features
8689 \begin_layout Standard
8690 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8699 is the innermost possible depth.
8700 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8703 \begin_layout Enumerate
8704 level #1 – outermost
8708 \begin_layout Enumerate
8713 \begin_layout Enumerate
8718 \begin_layout Enumerate
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Standard
8738 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8739 both of them in the example.
8740 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8750 For example, if we tried to nest another
8755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8762 , we would get errors.
8765 \begin_layout Subsection
8767 \begin_inset Index idx
8770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8779 \begin_layout Standard
8780 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8781 We have several examples of nested environments.
8782 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8787 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8790 \begin_layout Labeling
8791 \labelwidthstring MMM
8792 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8801 \begin_layout Labeling
8802 \labelwidthstring MMM
8803 #2-a This is level #2.
8804 We created it by using
8807 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8813 arg "depth-increment"
8820 \begin_layout Labeling
8821 \labelwidthstring MMM
8822 #3-a This is level #3.
8823 This time, we just enter
8830 arg "depth-increment"
8834 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
8838 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8844 arg "depth-increment"
8851 \begin_layout Standard
8856 environment, nested inside of
8857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8865 So, it's at level #4.
8866 We did this by entering
8869 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8875 arg "depth-increment"
8878 , then changing the paragraph environment to
8883 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8904 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
8907 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8913 \begin_layout Labeling
8914 \labelwidthstring MMM
8915 #4-a This is level #4.
8919 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8922 and changed the paragraph environment back to
8927 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
8931 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
8936 keep nesting things inside
8937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8948 \begin_layout Labeling
8949 \labelwidthstring MMM
8950 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
8955 \begin_layout Labeling
8956 \labelwidthstring MMM
8957 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
8958 and this is level #6.
8959 By now, you should know how we made these two.
8963 \begin_layout Labeling
8964 \labelwidthstring MMM
8965 #5-b Back to level #5.
8969 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8975 arg "depth-decrement"
8982 \begin_layout Labeling
8983 \labelwidthstring MMM
8987 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8993 arg "depth-decrement"
8996 , we're back at level #4.
9000 \begin_layout Labeling
9001 \labelwidthstring MMM
9002 #3-b Back to level #3.
9003 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9007 \begin_layout Labeling
9008 \labelwidthstring MMM
9009 #2-b Back to level #2.
9014 \begin_layout Labeling
9015 \labelwidthstring MMM
9016 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9017 After this sentence, we will enter
9021 and change the paragraph environment back to
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 We could have also used the
9045 environment in place of the
9050 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9054 Example 2: Inheritance
9057 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9058 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9061 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9070 arg "depth-increment"
9074 \begin_inset Newline newline
9077 which, we will change to the
9085 \begin_layout Enumerate
9090 environment, at level #2.
9093 \begin_layout Enumerate
9094 Notice how the nested
9098 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9102 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9106 \begin_layout Standard
9107 We ended this example by entering
9112 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9116 and reset the nesting depth by using
9119 arg "depth-decrement"
9125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9126 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9135 \begin_inset Argument 1
9138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9139 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9147 \begin_layout Enumerate
9148 This is level #1, in an
9152 paragraph environment.
9153 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9157 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9168 arg "depth-increment"
9172 Now, what happens if we nest an
9176 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9177 label be? An asterisk?
9181 \begin_layout Itemize
9191 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9192 So, its label is a bullet.
9193 (We got here by using
9196 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9202 arg "depth-increment"
9205 , then changing the environment to
9213 \begin_layout Itemize
9214 Here's level #4, produced using
9217 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9223 arg "depth-increment"
9227 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9232 \begin_layout Enumerate
9233 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9235 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9240 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9244 , because we are in the
9252 environment (that is, it is an
9267 \begin_layout Enumerate
9272 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9273 type of numbering does LyX use?
9276 \begin_layout Enumerate
9277 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9280 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9283 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9286 \begin_layout Enumerate
9290 arg "depth-decrement"
9293 to decrease the depth after the next
9296 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9305 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9309 \begin_layout Enumerate
9311 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9312 numeral as the label.Why?
9315 \begin_layout Enumerate
9316 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9325 Notice, however, that LyX
9329 reset the counter for the label.
9333 \begin_layout Enumerate
9337 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9343 arg "depth-decrement"
9346 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9347 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9348 into the twofold-nested
9356 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 The same thing happens if we do another
9360 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9366 arg "depth-decrement"
9369 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9372 \begin_layout Standard
9373 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9378 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9392 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9398 The same rule applies for the
9402 environment, as well.
9405 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9406 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9409 \begin_layout Enumerate
9410 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9411 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9412 the same detail with how we did it.
9421 \begin_layout Standard
9429 arg "depth-increment"
9436 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9437 the example in parentheses someplace.
9438 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9439 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9440 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9444 \begin_layout Enumerate
9449 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9454 Now we will add verse.
9455 \begin_inset Newline newline
9458 It will get much worse.
9459 \begin_inset Newline newline
9469 arg "depth-increment"
9480 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9481 \begin_inset Newline newline
9484 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9485 \begin_inset Newline newline
9491 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9504 \begin_layout Standard
9505 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9511 \begin_layout Standard
9513 \begin_inset Tabular
9514 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9515 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9516 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9517 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9606 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9616 arg "depth-increment"
9622 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9632 arg "depth-decrement"
9639 \begin_layout Enumerate
9644 : level #1) This is another item.
9645 Note that selecting a
9649 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9650 3 times to put the table inside the
9658 \begin_layout Quotation
9659 We're now ending the
9663 list and changing to
9668 We're still at level #1.
9669 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9670 The next set of paragraphs is a
9671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9678 We will nest both the
9685 \begin_inset space ~
9690 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9694 for the letter body.
9698 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9701 to preserve the depth.
9702 Remember that you need to use
9705 arg "newline-insert newline"
9708 to create multiple lines inside the
9715 \begin_inset space ~
9725 \begin_layout Right Address
9727 \begin_inset Newline newline
9730 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9731 \begin_inset Newline newline
9737 \begin_layout Address
9739 \begin_inset space ~
9745 \begin_layout Quotation
9746 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9750 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9751 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9752 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9753 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9754 as soon as possible.
9755 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9758 \begin_layout Quotation
9759 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9760 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9761 with your order, along with payment.
9764 \begin_layout Quotation
9765 We thank you again for your patience.
9768 \begin_layout Address
9770 \begin_inset Newline newline
9777 \begin_layout Quotation
9778 That ends that example!
9781 \begin_layout Standard
9782 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9783 just a few keystrokes.
9784 We could have easily nested an
9805 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9808 \begin_layout Section
9809 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9810 \begin_inset Index idx
9813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9822 \begin_layout Standard
9823 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
9824 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
9825 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
9826 be broken at the end of a line.
9827 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
9831 \begin_layout Subsection
9833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9835 name "sub:Protected-Space"
9840 \begin_inset Index idx
9843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9852 \begin_layout Standard
9853 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
9855 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
9859 Further documentation is given in section
9860 \begin_inset Newline newline
9864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9866 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9874 \begin_layout Standard
9875 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
9876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9890 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9899 A protected space is set with
9901 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9902 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9904 \begin_inset space ~
9912 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
9918 \begin_layout Subsection
9920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9922 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
9927 \begin_inset Index idx
9930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9931 Spacing ! Horizontal
9939 \begin_layout Standard
9940 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
9942 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9943 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9947 The length units are listed in Appendix
9948 \begin_inset space ~
9952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9954 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
9961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9965 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
9970 \begin_inset Index idx
9973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9982 \begin_layout Standard
9983 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
9984 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
9985 at the ends of sentences.
9986 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
9987 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
9988 followed by a period; see section
9989 \begin_inset space ~
9993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9995 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10000 To insert a normal space, select
10002 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10003 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10005 \begin_inset space ~
10013 arg "space-insert normal"
10019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10023 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10028 \begin_inset Index idx
10031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10040 \begin_layout Standard
10042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10049 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10058 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10059 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10060 inside abbreviations:
10063 \begin_layout Quote
10065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10069 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10072 \begin_layout Standard
10073 or between values and units.
10074 Compare for example this:
10075 \begin_inset Newline newline
10079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10083 \begin_inset Newline newline
10086 10 kg (normal space
10089 \begin_layout Standard
10090 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10092 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10093 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10095 \begin_inset space ~
10103 arg "space-insert thin"
10109 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10113 \begin_layout Standard
10114 You can also insert the following space types:
10117 \begin_layout Description
10119 \begin_inset space ~
10123 \begin_inset space ~
10126 space A line with a
10127 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10131 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10135 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10138 negative thin space between the arrows.
10141 \begin_layout Description
10143 \begin_inset space ~
10147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10151 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10155 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10159 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10163 \begin_inset space ~
10167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10170 em) space between the arrows.
10173 \begin_layout Description
10175 \begin_inset space ~
10179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10183 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10187 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10191 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10195 \begin_inset space ~
10199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10202 em) space between the arrows.
10205 \begin_layout Description
10207 \begin_inset space ~
10211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10215 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10219 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10223 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10227 \begin_inset space ~
10231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10234 em) space between the arrows.
10237 \begin_layout Description
10239 \begin_inset space ~
10243 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10247 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10252 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10259 cm space between the arrows.
10262 \begin_layout Standard
10264 \begin_inset space ~
10268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10270 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10274 lists the different space sizes.
10277 \begin_layout Standard
10278 \begin_inset Float table
10283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10285 \begin_inset Caption
10287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10290 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10294 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10304 \begin_inset Tabular
10305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10306 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10531 \begin_inset Index idx
10534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10543 \begin_layout Standard
10544 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10545 in a uniform fashion.
10546 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10547 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10548 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10549 equally between themselves.
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10553 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10556 \begin_layout Quote
10558 This is on the left side
10559 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10562 This is on the right
10565 \begin_layout Quote
10568 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10572 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10578 \begin_layout Quote
10581 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10585 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10589 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10595 \begin_layout Standard
10596 That was an example in the
10602 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10606 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10610 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10613 is one in a standard paragraph.
10614 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10618 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10621 \begin_layout Standard
10622 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10625 \begin_inset space ~
10630 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10633 \begin_layout Standard
10635 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10639 \begin_inset space ~
10645 \begin_layout Standard
10647 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10651 \begin_inset space ~
10657 \begin_layout Standard
10659 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10663 \begin_inset space ~
10669 \begin_layout Standard
10671 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10675 \begin_inset space ~
10681 \begin_layout Standard
10683 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10687 \begin_inset space ~
10693 \begin_layout Standard
10695 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10699 \begin_inset space ~
10705 \begin_layout Standard
10706 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10714 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10718 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10719 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10720 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10724 option in the space dialog.
10732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10736 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10741 \begin_inset Index idx
10744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10753 \begin_layout Standard
10754 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10755 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10758 \begin_layout Standard
10759 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10762 What is correct English?:
10763 \begin_inset Newline newline
10767 \begin_inset Newline newline
10771 \begin_inset space ~
10774 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
10775 \begin_inset Newline newline
10779 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10790 \begin_inset Newline newline
10794 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10805 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10811 \begin_layout Standard
10813 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10818 \begin_inset space ~
10822 \begin_inset space ~
10826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10830 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
10832 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10833 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10837 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
10839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10843 \begin_inset space ~
10847 \begin_inset space ~
10851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10854 into the phantom inset (note the space after
10855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10863 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
10864 That is why it is named
10865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10873 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
10874 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
10878 \begin_layout Subsection
10880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10882 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
10887 \begin_inset Index idx
10890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10899 \begin_layout Standard
10900 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
10902 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10903 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10905 \begin_inset space ~
10911 There you find the following sizes:
10914 \begin_layout Standard
10927 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
10932 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
10934 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10935 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10937 \begin_inset space ~
10943 \begin_inset Index idx
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10947 Document ! Settings
10952 for the paragraph separation.
10953 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
10964 \begin_layout Standard
10970 \begin_inset Index idx
10973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10979 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
10980 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
10985 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
10986 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
10995 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
10999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11004 s are described in section
11005 \begin_inset space ~
11009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11011 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11020 If there are several
11024 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11025 You can therefore use
11029 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11032 \begin_layout Standard
11037 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11038 \begin_inset space ~
11042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11044 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11051 \begin_layout Standard
11052 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11062 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11063 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11075 \begin_layout Subsection
11076 Paragraph Alignment
11077 \begin_inset Index idx
11080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11081 Paragraph ! Alignment
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11090 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11092 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11095 dialog (toolbar button
11098 arg "layout-paragraph"
11102 There are five possibilities:
11105 \begin_layout Itemize
11113 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11119 \begin_layout Itemize
11127 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11133 \begin_layout Itemize
11141 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11147 \begin_layout Itemize
11155 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11161 \begin_layout Itemize
11169 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11175 \begin_layout Standard
11176 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11177 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11178 the left and right margins.
11179 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11182 \begin_layout Standard
11184 This paragraph is right aligned,
11187 \begin_layout Standard
11189 this one is centered,
11192 \begin_layout Standard
11194 this one is left aligned.
11197 \begin_layout Subsection
11199 \begin_inset Index idx
11202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11203 Page breaks ! Forced
11209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11211 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11218 \begin_layout Standard
11219 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11220 can force a page break where you want one.
11221 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11222 Only if you use a lot of
11226 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11229 \begin_layout Standard
11230 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11231 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11235 have to change the page breaking.
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11239 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11241 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11243 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11244 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11246 \begin_inset space ~
11252 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11254 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11255 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11257 \begin_inset space ~
11262 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11264 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11265 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11268 \begin_layout Standard
11269 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11270 at the top of a page.
11271 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11272 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11273 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11274 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11278 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11282 to learn more about
11289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11293 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11298 \begin_inset Index idx
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 Page breaks ! Clear
11310 \begin_layout Standard
11311 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11312 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11313 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11314 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11315 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11318 \begin_layout Standard
11319 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11321 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11322 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11324 \begin_inset space ~
11330 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11332 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11333 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11335 \begin_inset space ~
11339 \begin_inset space ~
11344 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11345 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11348 \begin_layout Subsection
11350 \begin_inset Index idx
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11362 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11369 \begin_layout Standard
11370 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11372 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11374 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11375 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11377 \begin_inset space ~
11381 \begin_inset space ~
11389 arg "newline-insert newline"
11393 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11395 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11396 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11398 \begin_inset space ~
11402 \begin_inset space ~
11410 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11413 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11415 This is useful to avoid
11416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11423 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11426 \begin_layout Standard
11427 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11428 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11429 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11430 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11431 \begin_inset space ~
11435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11437 reference "sec:Quote"
11442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11444 reference "sec:Verse"
11449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11451 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11458 \begin_layout Subsection
11460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11462 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11467 \begin_inset Index idx
11470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11479 \begin_layout Standard
11481 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11492 \begin_layout Standard
11496 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11497 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11499 \begin_inset space ~
11504 you can insert horizontal lines.
11505 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11506 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11507 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11523 \begin_layout Section
11524 Characters and Symbols
11527 \begin_layout Standard
11528 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11529 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11530 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11538 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11542 for information on how this is done.
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11546 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11551 dialog via the menu
11553 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11554 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11560 \begin_layout Standard
11561 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11569 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11570 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11571 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11579 \begin_layout Section
11580 Fonts and Text Styles
11581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11583 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11590 \begin_layout Subsection
11592 \begin_inset Index idx
11595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 \begin_layout Standard
11605 There are two types of fonts:
11608 \begin_layout Description
11610 \begin_inset space ~
11614 \begin_inset Index idx
11617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11623 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11628 characters) in the font.
11629 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11630 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11631 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11632 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11633 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11634 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11635 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11636 \begin_inset Newline newline
11639 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11640 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11641 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11642 sizes than at small ones.
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11657 \begin_inset space ~
11665 \begin_layout Description
11667 \begin_inset space ~
11671 \begin_inset Index idx
11674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11680 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11681 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11682 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11683 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11684 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11685 image manipulation program.
11686 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11687 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11691 pixels high up to 34
11692 \begin_inset space ~
11695 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11696 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11697 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11699 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11700 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11701 \begin_inset Newline newline
11704 Bitmap fonts are named
11707 \begin_inset space ~
11712 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11715 \begin_layout Standard
11716 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11717 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11718 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11719 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11720 use scalable fonts.
11723 \begin_layout Standard
11724 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11727 \begin_layout Standard
11728 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11729 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11730 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11731 font to emphasize text, you use an
11732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11740 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11741 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11745 \begin_layout Subsection
11747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11749 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11756 \begin_layout Standard
11757 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11758 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11759 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11761 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11762 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11763 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
11764 to a word processor.
11765 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
11766 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
11767 across different machines.
11768 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
11769 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
11771 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
11773 \begin_inset space ~
11777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11779 reference "sub:Document-Font"
11784 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
11785 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
11789 \begin_layout Standard
11790 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
11791 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
11793 Both engines are supported by LyX.
11794 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
11795 that is installed on your system.
11796 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
11799 \begin_layout Standard
11800 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11808 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
11809 es; so you might have to experiment.
11817 \begin_layout Standard
11818 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11826 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
11827 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
11835 \begin_layout Subsection
11836 Document Font and Font size
11837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11839 name "sub:Document-Font"
11844 \begin_inset Index idx
11847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11854 \begin_inset Index idx
11857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11866 \begin_layout Standard
11867 You can set the document fonts in the
11869 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11873 \begin_inset Index idx
11876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11877 Document ! Settings
11887 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
11888 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
11891 \begin_inset space ~
11900 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
11901 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
11902 with the roman font.
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11921 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
11922 This requires that you use
11928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11967 as the output format, i.
11968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11972 \begin_inset space \space{}
11975 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
11976 \begin_inset space ~
11980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11982 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11987 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
11988 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
11990 \begin_inset space ~
11993 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
11994 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
11995 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
11997 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12000 \begin_layout Standard
12001 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12006 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12011 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12012 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12019 \begin_inset space ~
12025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12038 European Computer Modern
12041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12048 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12051 \begin_layout Standard
12060 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12061 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12066 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12069 \begin_inset space ~
12074 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12080 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12081 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12084 \begin_layout Itemize
12088 \begin_inset space ~
12093 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12106 \begin_inset space ~
12111 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12115 as the default font.
12116 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12117 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12134 One difference is improved kerning.
12142 \begin_layout Itemize
12146 \begin_inset space ~
12150 \begin_inset space ~
12155 fonts in (the rare) case that
12158 \begin_inset space ~
12163 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12178 Virtual means that it
12179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12190 -glyphs from other fonts.
12191 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12213 Loading the LaTeX-package
12218 \begin_inset Index idx
12221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12222 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12227 with the document preamble line
12228 \begin_inset Newline newline
12235 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12236 \begin_inset Newline newline
12241 will fix the guillemet problem.
12246 and that accented characters are not
12250 glyph, but built of
12254 characters, the accent and the letter.
12255 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12261 If you search for example for the French word
12262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12269 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12278 and not for the glyph
12279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 \begin_layout Itemize
12294 If you do not like the look of
12302 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12313 \begin_inset space ~
12323 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12324 \begin_inset space ~
12327 serif and typewriter fonts,
12331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12332 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12339 \begin_inset space ~
12348 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12353 \begin_inset space \space{}
12361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12365 \begin_inset space \space{}
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12379 \begin_inset space ~
12389 but you can also select your own.
12390 \begin_inset Newline newline
12393 The differences between roman,
12396 \begin_inset space ~
12405 fonts are explained in section
12406 \begin_inset space ~
12410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12412 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12417 \begin_inset Newline newline
12423 \begin_inset space ~
12428 was originally designed for newspapers.
12429 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12430 into the small newspaper columns.
12434 \begin_inset space ~
12439 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12442 \begin_layout Standard
12443 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12456 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12461 depends on the class you are using.
12462 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12465 \begin_layout Standard
12466 Note that the font size is the
12471 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12472 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12473 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12476 \begin_inset space ~
12482 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12489 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12496 \begin_layout Standard
12500 \begin_inset space ~
12505 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12507 \begin_inset space ~
12510 serif or typewriter.
12515 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12525 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12528 \begin_layout Standard
12537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12546 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12552 \begin_inset Index idx
12555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12556 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12568 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12573 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12574 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12581 \begin_layout Standard
12582 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12584 Use Old Style Figures
12588 Use True Small Caps
12591 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12594 Use Old Style Figures
12596 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12598 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12606 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12610 Use True Small Caps
12612 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12613 of scaled capitals.
12614 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12615 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12618 \begin_layout Standard
12623 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12624 a font to display the script characters.
12628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12629 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12634 \begin_inset Index idx
12637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12638 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12643 So this has no effect for the document language
12657 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12661 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12669 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12673 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12674 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12675 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12677 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12680 dialog, see section
12681 \begin_inset space ~
12685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12687 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12699 \begin_layout Subsection
12700 Using Different Character Styles
12701 \begin_inset Index idx
12704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12711 \begin_inset Index idx
12714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 \begin_layout Standard
12724 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12725 certain paragraph environments.
12726 LyX supports two character styles,
12735 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12739 \begin_layout Standard
12744 style, do one of the following:
12747 \begin_layout Itemize
12748 click on the toolbar button
12757 \begin_layout Itemize
12758 use the key binding
12767 \begin_layout Standard
12768 These commands are all toggles.
12773 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12777 One typically uses the
12781 style for proper names.
12783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12790 is the original author of LyX.
12791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12797 \begin_layout Standard
12798 A more widely used character style is the
12803 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12810 \begin_layout Itemize
12811 clicking on the toolbar button
12820 \begin_layout Itemize
12821 using the keybindings
12830 \begin_layout Standard
12835 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12836 es use a different font.
12839 \begin_layout Standard
12840 We've been using the
12844 style all over the place in this document.
12845 Here's one more example:
12848 \begin_layout Quotation
12851 Do not overuse character styles!
12854 \begin_layout Standard
12855 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12856 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12857 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12858 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
12862 \begin_layout Standard
12863 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12871 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12873 \begin_inset space ~
12876 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12882 arg "dialog-show character"
12888 \begin_layout Subsection
12889 Fine-Tuning with the
12894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12896 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12901 \begin_inset Index idx
12904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12913 \begin_layout Standard
12914 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
12915 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12916 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12917 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12918 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
12919 from ordinary dialog.
12922 \begin_layout Standard
12923 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
12924 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
12925 \begin_inset Newline newline
12928 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
12929 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12933 To use custom character styles, open the
12935 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12937 \begin_inset space ~
12940 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12943 dialog or press the toolbar button
12946 arg "dialog-show character"
12950 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
12951 font property that you can choose.
12952 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
12955 \begin_inset space ~
12960 , which keeps the current state of that property.
12965 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
12966 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
12967 environments all at once.
12970 \begin_layout Standard
12971 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
12974 \begin_inset space ~
12986 \begin_layout Labeling
12987 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
12993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13001 The possible options are:
13005 \begin_layout Labeling
13006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13011 This is the Roman font family.
13012 Normally a serif font.
13013 It's also the default family.
13023 \begin_layout Labeling
13024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13028 \begin_inset space ~
13035 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13047 \begin_layout Labeling
13048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13055 This is the Typewriter font family.
13061 arg "font-typewriter"
13070 \begin_layout Labeling
13071 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13076 This corresponds to the print weight.
13081 \begin_layout Labeling
13082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13087 This is the Medium font series.
13088 It's also the default series.
13091 \begin_layout Labeling
13092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13099 This is the Bold font series.
13112 \begin_layout Labeling
13113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13118 As the name implies.
13123 \begin_layout Labeling
13124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13129 This is the Upright font shape.
13130 It's also the default shape.
13133 \begin_layout Labeling
13134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13148 s the Italic font shape
13154 \begin_layout Labeling
13155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13162 This is the Slanted font shape
13164 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13167 \begin_layout Labeling
13168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13179 This is the Small caps font shape
13186 \begin_layout Labeling
13187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13192 Alters the text color.
13193 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13202 , which means that the document default color set in
13204 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13205 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13216 is used, you can choose between
13249 \begin_inset Index idx
13252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13261 \begin_layout Labeling
13262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13267 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13268 the language of the document.
13269 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13271 \begin_inset Newline newline
13274 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13275 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13276 When using the spell checking (see section
13277 \begin_inset space ~
13281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13283 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13287 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13290 \begin_layout Labeling
13291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13296 Alters the size of the font.
13297 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13298 proportional to the document font size.
13299 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13300 what you want to do.
13305 \begin_layout Labeling
13306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13327 arg "font-size tiny"
13333 \begin_layout Labeling
13334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13355 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13361 \begin_layout Labeling
13362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13383 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13389 \begin_layout Labeling
13390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13411 arg "font-size small"
13417 \begin_layout Labeling
13418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13432 It's also the default size.
13436 arg "font-size normal"
13442 \begin_layout Labeling
13443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13464 arg "font-size large"
13470 \begin_layout Labeling
13471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13492 arg "font-size larger"
13498 \begin_layout Labeling
13499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13520 arg "font-size largest"
13526 \begin_layout Labeling
13527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13548 arg "font-size huge"
13554 \begin_layout Labeling
13555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13576 arg "font-size giant"
13582 \begin_layout Labeling
13583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13588 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13608 arg "font-size increase"
13614 \begin_layout Labeling
13615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13620 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13640 arg "font-size decrease"
13647 \begin_layout Standard
13652 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13653 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13654 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13655 — use those instead.
13656 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13659 \begin_layout Labeling
13660 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13665 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13670 \begin_layout Labeling
13671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13678 This is text with emphasize on
13681 This might seem like the same as
13685 , but it is actually a bit different.
13691 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13693 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13696 \begin_layout Labeling
13697 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13704 This is text with Underbar on.
13710 arg "font-underline"
13716 \begin_inset Newline newline
13721 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13722 when you could not change fonts.
13723 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13724 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13728 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13731 \begin_layout Labeling
13732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13736 \begin_inset space ~
13743 This is text with Double underbar on.
13749 arg "font-underunderline"
13753 \begin_inset Newline newline
13756 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13757 about double underbar.
13760 \begin_layout Labeling
13761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13765 \begin_inset space ~
13772 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13778 arg "font-underwave"
13782 \begin_inset Newline newline
13785 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13786 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13789 \begin_layout Labeling
13790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13797 This is text with Strikeout on.
13803 arg "font-strikeout"
13807 \begin_inset Newline newline
13810 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
13811 changed in the meantime.
13814 \begin_layout Labeling
13815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13822 This is text with Noun on.
13829 , this is a logical attribute.
13830 Normally it's equivalent to
13833 \begin_inset space ~
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13843 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13844 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
13846 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13848 \begin_inset space ~
13851 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13857 arg "dialog-show character"
13860 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
13861 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
13864 arg "textstyle-apply"
13868 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
13872 \begin_layout Standard
13873 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13880 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13881 (suppose you just set the shape to
13882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13900 \begin_inset space ~
13912 \begin_layout Standard
13913 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
13921 \begin_inset space ~
13933 \begin_layout Itemize
13939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13946 font, which means every character has the same width; the
13947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13964 \begin_inset Newline newline
13968 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13982 \begin_inset Note Note
13985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13986 For more on phantoms see section
13987 \begin_inset space ~
13991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13993 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14003 \begin_inset Newline newline
14009 \begin_layout Itemize
14014 fonts use characters with serifs.
14015 These are the small
14016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14023 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14024 The following example shows the difference:
14025 \begin_inset Newline newline
14029 \begin_inset Newline newline
14034 text without serifs
14037 \begin_inset Newline newline
14040 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14041 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14048 \begin_layout Itemize
14053 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14054 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14055 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14058 \begin_layout Standard
14059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14066 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14067 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14070 \begin_inset space ~
14075 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14076 the property to be removed.
14077 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14078 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14079 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14097 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14098 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14106 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14110 \begin_inset space ~
14115 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14126 If you, for example, set
14127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14145 \begin_inset space ~
14150 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14159 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14162 \begin_layout Standard
14163 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14164 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14167 \begin_layout Section
14168 Printing and Previewing
14171 \begin_layout Subsection
14175 \begin_layout Standard
14176 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14177 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14178 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14179 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14180 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14182 Additional Features
14187 \begin_layout Standard
14188 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14189 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14190 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14191 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14192 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14193 This happens in two stages:
14196 \begin_layout Enumerate
14197 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14198 generating a file with the extension,
14199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14213 \begin_layout Enumerate
14214 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14218 file to produce printable output.
14222 \begin_layout Subsection
14223 Output file formats
14224 \begin_inset Index idx
14227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14236 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14244 Simple text (ASCII)
14245 \begin_inset Index idx
14248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14249 File formats ! ASCII
14257 \begin_layout Standard
14258 This file type has the extension
14259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14271 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14275 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14282 \begin_layout Standard
14283 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14285 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14286 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14288 \begin_inset space ~
14295 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14296 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14298 \begin_inset space ~
14302 \begin_inset space ~
14308 The latter will first internally export to PostScript and then do the conversio
14312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14314 \begin_inset Index idx
14317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14318 File formats ! LaTeX
14326 \begin_layout Standard
14327 This file type has the extension
14328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14339 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14341 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14342 it manually with console commands.
14343 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14344 you view or export your document.
14347 \begin_layout Standard
14348 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14350 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14351 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14366 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14367 \begin_inset space ~
14371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14373 reference "sub:Export"
14380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14382 \begin_inset Index idx
14385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14394 \begin_layout Standard
14395 This file type has the extension
14396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14416 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14417 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14418 DVIs are used for quick previews and as pre-stage for other output formats,
14422 \begin_layout Standard
14423 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14424 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14425 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14426 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14427 when you view the DVI.
14428 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14431 \begin_layout Standard
14432 You can export your document to DVI by the menu
14434 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14435 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14440 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14441 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14443 \begin_inset space ~
14450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14460 The latter option uses the program
14469 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14470 font access (see section
14471 \begin_inset space ~
14475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14477 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14482 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14483 standard TeX processor.
14486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14488 \begin_inset Index idx
14491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14492 File formats ! PostScript
14500 \begin_layout Standard
14501 This file type has the extension
14502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14514 PostScript was developed by the company
14518 as a printer language.
14519 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14521 PostScript can be seen as a
14522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14525 programming language
14526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14529 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14534 When you are interested to learn more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-packa
14540 \begin_inset Index idx
14543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14544 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14554 Due to this ability, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14557 \begin_layout Standard
14558 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14562 Encapsulated PostScript
14563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14566 (EPS, file extension
14567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14579 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14580 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14586 \begin_inset space \space{}
14590 \begin_inset space ~
14593 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14594 \begin_inset space ~
14597 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14598 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14599 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14600 EPS to avoid this problem.
14603 \begin_layout Standard
14604 You can export your document to PostScript using the menu
14606 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14607 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14613 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14615 \begin_inset Index idx
14618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14625 \begin_inset Index idx
14628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14637 \begin_layout Standard
14638 This file type has the extension
14639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14655 Portable Document Format
14656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14663 was derived from PostScript.
14664 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14673 implies, it can be processed at any computer system and the printed output
14674 looks exactly the same.
14677 \begin_layout Standard
14678 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14682 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14686 (JPG, file extension
14687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14714 Portable Network Graphics
14715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14718 (PNG, file extension
14719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14731 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14732 background to one of these formats.
14733 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14734 will slow down your workflow.
14735 So we recommend using images in one of the three mentioned formats.
14738 \begin_layout Standard
14739 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14741 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14747 \begin_layout Description
14749 \begin_inset space ~
14752 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
14756 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14757 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14761 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14762 So this export variant consist of three conversions.
14765 \begin_layout Description
14767 \begin_inset space ~
14770 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14774 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14778 \begin_layout Description
14780 \begin_inset space ~
14783 (pdflatex) This uses the program
14787 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14790 \begin_layout Description
14792 \begin_inset space ~
14799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14806 X) This uses the program
14810 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14815 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14816 font access (see section
14817 \begin_inset space ~
14821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14823 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14828 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example verticall
14829 y written Japanese.
14832 \begin_layout Description
14834 \begin_inset space ~
14841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14848 X) This uses the program
14852 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14857 is an even newer engine, derived from
14861 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
14862 access (see section
14863 \begin_inset space ~
14867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14869 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14874 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14875 standard TeX processor.
14878 \begin_layout Standard
14882 \begin_inset space ~
14891 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14892 works without problems.
14893 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
14894 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
14898 \begin_inset space ~
14905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14917 \begin_inset space ~
14924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14933 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
14941 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14943 \begin_inset Index idx
14946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14947 FileFormats ! XHTML
14953 \begin_inset Index idx
14956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14965 \begin_layout Standard
14966 This file type has the extension
14967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14979 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
14980 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
14981 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
14982 suitable for the purpose.
14983 For the math output you can choose in the menu
14985 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14986 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14989 between different formats, which are described in section
14991 Math Output in XHTML
14996 \begin_inset space ~
15004 \begin_layout Standard
15005 XHTML output remains
15006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15013 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15016 LyX and the World Wide Web
15020 Additional Features
15022 manual, for more information.
15025 \begin_layout Standard
15026 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15028 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15029 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15035 \begin_layout Subsection
15037 \begin_inset Index idx
15040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15049 \begin_layout Standard
15050 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15051 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15060 or use the toolbar button
15067 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15068 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15075 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15079 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15087 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15092 Further output formats can be selected via
15094 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15097 or the toolbar button
15098 \begin_inset Graphics
15099 filename ../images/view-others.png
15101 groupId toolbarbuttons
15108 \begin_layout Standard
15109 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15110 viewer window using the menu
15112 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15117 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15118 Update (Other Formats)
15123 \begin_layout Standard
15124 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15126 To have a real output, export your document.
15129 \begin_layout Subsection
15130 Printing the File from within LyX
15131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15133 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15140 \begin_layout Standard
15141 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15142 it directly from within LyX.
15143 To print a file, select the menu
15145 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15148 or click on the toolbar button
15151 arg "dialog-show print"
15155 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15156 This file is then processed by the program
15160 to PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15165 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15168 \begin_layout Standard
15169 You can choose to print only even-numbered or odd-numbered pages — this
15170 is useful for printing on two sides: You can re-insert the pages after
15171 printing one set to print on the other side.
15172 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15173 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15174 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15177 \begin_layout Standard
15178 You can set the following print parameters in the
15181 \begin_inset space ~
15189 \begin_layout Labeling
15190 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15195 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15200 Note that this printer name is for the program
15209 has to be configured for this printer name.
15210 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15211 \begin_inset space ~
15215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15217 reference "sub:Printer"
15226 The printer should understand PostScript.
15229 \begin_layout Labeling
15230 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15235 The name of a file to print to.
15236 The output will be a PostScript file.
15237 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15241 \begin_layout Section
15242 A few Words about Typography
15243 \begin_inset Index idx
15246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15255 \begin_layout Subsection
15256 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15257 \begin_inset Index idx
15260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15267 \begin_inset Index idx
15270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15279 \begin_layout Standard
15281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15292 character comes in four lengths: the
15304 , and the minus sign:
15305 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15311 \begin_layout Standard
15312 \begin_inset Tabular
15313 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15314 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15315 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15316 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15317 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15318 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15347 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15387 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15412 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15414 \begin_inset space ~
15417 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15424 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15449 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15451 \begin_inset space ~
15454 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15475 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15509 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15515 \begin_layout Standard
15516 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15528 character multiple times in a row.
15529 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15530 the final output, but not in LyX.
15532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15562 \begin_layout Standard
15563 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15564 math mode and has a length of its own.
15565 Here are some examples:
15568 \begin_layout Enumerate
15569 line- and page-breaks
15570 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15580 \begin_layout Enumerate
15582 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15592 \begin_layout Enumerate
15593 Oh — there's a dash.
15594 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15604 \begin_layout Enumerate
15605 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15609 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15619 \begin_layout Subsection
15621 \begin_inset Index idx
15624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15633 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15640 \begin_layout Standard
15641 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15642 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15647 \begin_inset Index idx
15650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15651 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15656 following the rules of the document language.
15659 \begin_layout Standard
15660 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly, it only has problems with text in the
15665 font and with unusual constructs, like
15666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15674 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15676 This is done with the menu
15678 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15679 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15681 \begin_inset space ~
15687 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15688 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15691 \begin_layout Standard
15692 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15693 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15703 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15711 as a hyphenation possibility.
15712 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15713 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15714 as described in section
15715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15718 Prevent Hyphenation
15719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15725 \begin_inset space ~
15733 \begin_layout Subsection
15735 \begin_inset Index idx
15738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15748 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15751 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15758 \begin_layout Standard
15759 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15760 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15761 LaTeX then adds the
15762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 appropriate amount of space
15766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15770 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15772 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
15773 gets after another word.
15776 \begin_layout Standard
15777 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15778 not work in all cases.
15780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15791 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15792 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15795 \begin_layout Standard
15796 Here are some examples of
15800 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
15803 \begin_layout Itemize
15808 \begin_layout Itemize
15813 \begin_layout Standard
15814 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15817 \begin_layout Itemize
15819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15823 this is too much space!
15826 \begin_layout Itemize
15831 \begin_layout Standard
15832 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15835 \begin_layout Standard
15836 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15839 \begin_layout Enumerate
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15848 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15849 \begin_inset space ~
15853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15855 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15860 \begin_inset Index idx
15863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15864 Spaces ! inter-word
15872 \begin_layout Enumerate
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15881 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15882 \begin_inset space ~
15886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15888 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
15893 \begin_inset Index idx
15896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15905 \begin_layout Enumerate
15909 \begin_inset space ~
15913 \begin_inset space ~
15917 \begin_inset space ~
15924 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15926 \begin_inset space ~
15931 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15932 This function is also bound to
15935 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15942 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15945 \begin_layout Itemize
15947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15951 \begin_inset space \space{}
15954 this is too much space!
15957 \begin_layout Itemize
15958 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
15962 \begin_layout Standard
15963 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15964 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
15965 will take care of this.
15968 \begin_layout Standard
15969 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
15973 \begin_inset space ~
15978 feature described in section
15984 Additional Features
15989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15991 \begin_inset Index idx
15994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15995 Typography ! Quotes
16001 \begin_inset Index idx
16004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16035 \begin_layout Standard
16036 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16037 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16038 and use a closing quote at the end.
16040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16048 The keyboard character,
16052 , generates this automatically.
16055 \begin_layout Standard
16056 You can specify what character the
16060 key produces using the submenu
16066 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16070 \begin_inset Index idx
16073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16074 Document ! Settings
16084 There are six choices:
16087 \begin_layout Labeling
16088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16100 Use quotes like this
16101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16111 \begin_layout Labeling
16112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16115 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16119 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16125 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16129 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16135 \begin_layout Labeling
16136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16139 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16143 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16149 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16153 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16159 \begin_layout Labeling
16160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16163 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16167 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16173 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16177 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16183 \begin_layout Labeling
16184 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16187 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16191 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16197 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16201 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16207 \begin_layout Labeling
16208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16211 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16215 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16221 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16225 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16231 \begin_layout Subsection
16233 \begin_inset Index idx
16236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16237 Typography ! Ligatures
16243 \begin_inset Index idx
16246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16277 name "sub:Ligatures"
16284 \begin_layout Standard
16285 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16286 print them as single characters.
16287 These groups are known as
16292 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16294 Here are the standard ligatures:
16297 \begin_layout Itemize
16301 \begin_layout Itemize
16305 \begin_layout Itemize
16309 \begin_layout Itemize
16313 \begin_layout Itemize
16317 \begin_layout Standard
16318 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16321 \begin_layout Standard
16322 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16323 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16331 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16347 To break a ligature, use
16349 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16350 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16352 \begin_inset space ~
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16370 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16387 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16395 \begin_layout Subsection
16397 \begin_inset Index idx
16400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16409 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16416 \begin_layout Standard
16417 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16418 characters in different sizes and heights.
16419 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16420 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16440 \begin_inset Note Note
16443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16444 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16452 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16453 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16458 Note the order of the upper-and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the following
16462 \begin_layout Description
16463 LyX The name of the game, write
16464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 \begin_layout Description
16486 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16508 \begin_layout Description
16509 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16531 \begin_layout Description
16532 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16554 \begin_layout Standard
16555 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16560 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16568 It's an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16569 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16570 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16573 : The actual version is
16574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16581 , the previous one was
16582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16592 \begin_layout Standard
16593 If you don't want to use proper names, e.
16594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16598 \begin_inset space \space{}
16601 in section headings, you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the
16603 This will look in LyX like:
16604 \begin_inset Graphics
16605 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16611 \begin_inset Newline newline
16614 For more about TeX Code, look at section
16615 \begin_inset space ~
16619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16621 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16628 \begin_layout Subsection
16630 \begin_inset Index idx
16633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16642 \begin_layout Standard
16643 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16644 space between two words.
16645 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16655 for units use the menu
16657 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16658 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16660 \begin_inset space ~
16668 arg "space-insert thin"
16674 \begin_layout Standard
16675 Here is an example to show the differences:
16678 \begin_layout Standard
16679 \begin_inset Tabular
16680 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16681 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16682 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16683 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16690 \begin_inset space ~
16694 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16706 space between number and unit
16713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16722 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16734 half space between number and unit
16747 \begin_layout Subsection
16749 \begin_inset Index idx
16752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16753 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16761 \begin_layout Standard
16762 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16764 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16765 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16766 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16767 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16768 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16769 These bits of text became known as
16780 \begin_layout Standard
16781 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16782 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16783 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16784 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16785 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16786 to specifically prevent widows and orphans.
16787 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16791 There's no way we can go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page,
16792 or how you can tweak that behavior.
16793 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
16794 \begin_inset space ~
16798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16800 key "latexcompanion"
16805 \begin_inset space ~
16809 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16815 ) may have more information.
16816 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16819 \begin_layout Chapter
16820 Notes, Graphics, Tables, and Floats
16821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16823 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16830 \begin_layout Standard
16831 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16834 \begin_inset space ~
16840 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16843 \begin_layout Section
16845 \begin_inset Index idx
16848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16864 \begin_layout Standard
16865 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16868 \begin_layout Description
16870 \begin_inset space ~
16873 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16874 \begin_inset Newline newline
16878 \begin_inset Note Note
16881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16882 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16890 \begin_layout Description
16891 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
16892 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
16894 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16895 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16897 \begin_inset space ~
16903 \begin_inset Newline newline
16907 \begin_inset Note Comment
16910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16911 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
16919 \begin_layout Description
16921 \begin_inset space ~
16924 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16925 set in the document settings under
16927 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16929 \begin_inset space ~
16935 \begin_inset Newline newline
16939 \begin_inset Newline newline
16943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16952 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16953 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16958 of a comment that appears in the output.
16964 \begin_inset Newline newline
16968 \begin_inset Newline newline
16971 As you can see in the example, the first line of greyed out notes is a bit
16972 indented and greyed out notes can have footnotes.
16975 \begin_layout Standard
16976 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
16984 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16988 Right-click on the appearing note box to select the note type.
16991 \begin_layout Section
16993 \begin_inset Index idx
16996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17005 name "sec:Footnotes"
17012 \begin_layout Standard
17013 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17016 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17019 or the toolbar button
17022 arg "footnote-insert"
17034 \begin_inset Graphics
17035 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17044 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17073 label, the box will
17077 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17078 Clicking on the box label again, will close
17091 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17092 and click on the footnote
17107 \begin_layout Standard
17108 Here is an example footnote:
17116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17117 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17125 \begin_layout Standard
17126 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17127 position where the footnote box is placed.
17128 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17129 The footnote number is calculated by LyX.
17130 The numbers are consecutive, no matter in which chapter the footnote is
17132 LyX doesn't support other numbering schemes yet, but you can get other
17133 schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17138 ey are described in the
17141 \begin_inset space ~
17149 \begin_layout Section
17151 \begin_inset Index idx
17154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17163 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17170 \begin_layout Standard
17171 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17172 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17174 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17176 \begin_inset space ~
17181 or the toolbar button
17184 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17210 appearing within your text.
17211 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17220 \begin_layout Standard
17221 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17225 \begin_inset Marginal
17228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17229 This is a marginal note.
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17238 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17239 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17240 pages, right on odd pages.
17243 \begin_layout Standard
17244 For further information about marginal notes see section
17247 \begin_inset space ~
17255 \begin_inset space ~
17263 \begin_layout Section
17264 Graphics and Images
17265 \begin_inset Index idx
17268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17275 \begin_inset Index idx
17278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17287 name "sec:Graphics"
17294 \begin_layout Standard
17295 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17296 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17299 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17304 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17308 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17311 \begin_layout Standard
17312 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17317 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17318 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17320 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17321 \begin_inset space ~
17325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17327 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17334 \begin_layout Standard
17339 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17340 of the image in the output.
17341 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17345 \begin_inset space ~
17349 \begin_inset space ~
17358 \begin_inset space ~
17362 \begin_inset space ~
17366 \begin_inset space ~
17371 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17372 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17380 \begin_layout Standard
17383 LaTeX and LyX options
17385 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17386 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17390 \begin_inset space ~
17395 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17396 with the image size is printed.
17400 \begin_inset space ~
17404 \begin_inset space ~
17408 \begin_inset space ~
17413 is explained in the
17416 \begin_inset space ~
17428 \begin_layout Standard
17429 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17430 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17432 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17436 \begin_layout Standard
17438 \begin_inset Graphics
17439 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17447 \begin_layout Standard
17448 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17449 the image into a float, see section
17450 \begin_inset space ~
17454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17456 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17463 \begin_layout Subsection
17465 \begin_inset Index idx
17468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17477 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17484 \begin_layout Standard
17485 You can insert images in any known file format.
17486 But as we explained in section
17487 \begin_inset space ~
17491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17493 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17497 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17498 LyX therefore uses the program
17502 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17503 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17504 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17505 \begin_inset space ~
17509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17511 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17518 \begin_layout Standard
17519 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17522 \begin_layout Description
17524 \begin_inset space ~
17527 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17528 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17529 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17533 Graphics Interchange Format
17534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17537 (GIF, file extension
17538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17550 \begin_inset Index idx
17553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17585 Portable Network Graphics
17586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17589 (PNG, file extension
17590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17602 \begin_inset Index idx
17605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17637 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17641 (JPG, file extension
17642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17666 \begin_inset Index idx
17669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17700 \begin_layout Description
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17705 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17707 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
17708 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17709 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17710 \begin_inset Newline newline
17713 Scalable image formats can be
17714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17717 Scalable Vector Graphics
17718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17721 (SVG, file extension
17722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17734 \begin_inset Index idx
17737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17769 Encapsulated PostScript
17770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17773 (EPS, file extension
17774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17786 \begin_inset Index idx
17789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17821 Portable Document Format
17822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17825 (PDF, file extension
17826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17838 \begin_inset Index idx
17841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17856 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
17857 result will not be scalable.
17858 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17864 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17872 \begin_layout Standard
17873 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only vice
17877 \begin_layout Subsection
17878 Grouping of Image Settings
17879 \begin_inset Index idx
17882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17883 Images ! Settings grouping
17891 \begin_layout Standard
17892 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17894 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17895 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17897 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17898 need to manually change each of them.
17902 \begin_layout Standard
17903 A new group can be set by entering a name in the
17906 \begin_inset space ~
17911 field in the Graphics dialog.
17912 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
17913 by checking the name of the desired group.
17916 \begin_layout Section
17918 \begin_inset Index idx
17921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17937 \begin_layout Standard
17938 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
17941 arg "tabular-insert"
17946 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17950 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
17951 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
17952 from the rest of the table.
17953 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
17954 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
17956 Here is an example table:
17959 \begin_layout Standard
17961 \begin_inset Tabular
17962 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
17963 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17964 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17965 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
17967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18167 \begin_layout Subsection
18171 \begin_layout Standard
18172 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18175 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18179 This brings up the table dialog.
18180 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18181 cursor is placed currently.
18182 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18183 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18184 done on all of your selection.
18187 \begin_layout Standard
18188 In addition to the table dialog, the
18191 \begin_inset space ~
18196 helps you in setting table properties.
18197 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18200 \begin_layout Standard
18204 \begin_inset space ~
18209 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18210 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18211 current cell respectively.
18212 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18214 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18215 of text, see section
18216 \begin_inset space ~
18220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18222 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18229 \begin_layout Standard
18230 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18231 using the check box
18240 This will merge the cells to
18244 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18245 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18246 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18247 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18248 in the last row without the upper border:
18251 \begin_layout Standard
18253 \begin_inset Tabular
18254 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18255 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18256 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18257 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="0">
18258 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18259 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18270 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18279 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18355 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18390 \begin_layout Standard
18391 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18392 They are necessary for special table formatting, like for multirow cells,
18393 explained in the chapter
18400 \begin_inset space ~
18406 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18410 degrees counterclockwise.
18411 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18414 \begin_layout Standard
18415 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18423 Most DVI-viewers are
18427 able to display rotations.
18435 \begin_layout Standard
18440 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18445 adds lines for all cell borders.
18448 \begin_layout Subsection
18450 \begin_inset Index idx
18453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18454 Tables ! Longtables
18460 \begin_inset Index idx
18463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18472 \begin_layout Standard
18473 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18476 \begin_inset space ~
18480 \begin_inset space ~
18489 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18490 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18493 \begin_layout Description
18498 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18499 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable;
18500 except for the first page, if
18503 \begin_inset space ~
18511 \begin_layout Description
18515 \begin_inset space ~
18520 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18521 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18524 \begin_layout Description
18529 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18530 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable;
18531 except for the last page, if
18534 \begin_inset space ~
18542 \begin_layout Description
18546 \begin_inset space ~
18551 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18552 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18555 \begin_layout Description
18556 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18557 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18559 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18563 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18566 \begin_inset space ~
18574 \begin_layout Standard
18575 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18576 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18577 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18583 In this context, first means first in this order:
18586 \begin_inset space ~
18598 \begin_inset space ~
18603 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18606 \begin_layout Standard
18608 \begin_inset Tabular
18609 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18610 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18611 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18612 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18613 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18614 <row endfirsthead="true">
18615 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18621 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18626 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18635 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18645 <row endfirsthead="true">
18646 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18657 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18666 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18678 <row endhead="true">
18679 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18690 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18699 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18709 <row endhead="true">
18710 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18721 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18730 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18742 <row endfoot="true">
18743 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18754 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18763 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18794 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20291 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20384 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <row endlastfoot="true">
20725 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20736 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20762 \begin_layout Subsection
20764 \begin_inset Index idx
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20776 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20783 \begin_layout Standard
20784 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20785 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20786 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20787 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20791 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
20794 \begin_layout Standard
20795 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20796 for the column in the table dialog.
20797 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20798 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20802 \begin_layout Standard
20804 \begin_inset Tabular
20805 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20806 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
20807 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20808 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 This is longer now.
20959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21010 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21011 This is longer now.
21016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 \begin_layout Standard
21043 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21044 You can cut and paste even more than one row.
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 Note, that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would
21050 not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21056 Selection with the mouse or with
21060 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21061 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21062 the selection from outside the table.
21065 \begin_layout Section
21067 \begin_inset Index idx
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21086 \begin_layout Subsection
21090 \begin_layout Standard
21091 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21092 have a fixed location.
21094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21101 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21109 \begin_inset space ~
21114 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21115 too many notes on the current page.
21118 \begin_layout Standard
21119 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21120 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21121 and pages without text.
21122 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21123 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21124 Floats are therefore numbered.
21125 Referencing is described in section
21126 \begin_inset space ~
21130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21132 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21139 \begin_layout Standard
21140 To insert a float, use the menu
21142 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21146 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21147 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21149 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21150 \begin_inset Index idx
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21160 paragraph within the float.
21161 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21162 by left-clicking on the box label.
21163 A closed float box looks like this:
21164 \begin_inset Graphics
21165 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21170 – a gray button with a red label.
21173 \begin_layout Standard
21174 It is recommended to insert floats as a separate paragraph to avoid possible
21175 LaTeX-errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21178 \begin_layout Subsection
21182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21186 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21191 \begin_inset Index idx
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 Floats ! Figure floats
21203 \begin_layout Standard
21205 \begin_inset space ~
21209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21211 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21215 was created using the menu
21217 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21218 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21221 or the toolbar button
21224 arg "float-insert figure"
21228 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21231 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21234 or the toolbar button
21237 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21241 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21242 in front of or behind the image and using the menu
21244 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21246 \begin_inset space ~
21251 or the toolbar button
21254 arg "layout-paragraph"
21260 \begin_layout Standard
21261 \begin_inset Float figure
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 \begin_inset Graphics
21269 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21284 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21288 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21301 \begin_layout Standard
21302 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21303 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21305 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21308 or the toolbar button
21314 and refer to it using the menu
21316 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21319 or the toolbar button
21322 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21326 It is important to use references to figure floats, rather than using vague
21328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21335 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21345 For more about cross-references, see section
21346 \begin_inset space ~
21350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21352 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21359 \begin_layout Standard
21360 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21361 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21362 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21363 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21364 as described in section
21365 \begin_inset space ~
21369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21371 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21377 \begin_inset space ~
21381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21383 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21387 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21388 You can also set the images one below the other.
21390 \begin_inset space ~
21394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21396 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21403 reference "fig:Platypus"
21407 are the subfigures.
21410 \begin_layout Standard
21411 \begin_inset Float figure
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21421 \begin_inset Float figure
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21432 name "fig:Undefinable"
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 \begin_inset Graphics
21446 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21461 \begin_inset Float figure
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21472 name "fig:Platypus"
21484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21485 \begin_inset Graphics
21486 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21498 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21505 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21510 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21514 Two distorted images.
21527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21529 \begin_inset Index idx
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 Floats ! Table floats
21541 \begin_layout Standard
21542 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21544 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21545 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21548 or the toolbar button
21551 arg "float-insert table"
21555 They have the same properties as figure floats except for the different
21558 \begin_inset space ~
21562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21564 reference "tab:Table-float"
21571 \begin_layout Standard
21572 \begin_inset Float table
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21583 name "tab:Table-float"
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 \begin_inset Tabular
21598 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21599 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21600 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21601 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21602 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21750 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21753 \end{array}\right]$
21761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21774 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21795 \begin_layout Subsection
21797 \begin_inset Index idx
21800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 \begin_layout Standard
21810 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21811 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21812 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21814 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in chapter
21822 \begin_inset space ~
21830 \begin_layout Section
21832 \begin_inset Index idx
21835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21844 name "sec:Minipages"
21851 \begin_layout Standard
21852 LaTeX provides a mechanism to produce essentially a page within a page,
21854 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21855 \begin_inset space \space{}
21862 \begin_layout Standard
21863 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21865 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21869 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21870 and its alignment within the page.
21873 \begin_layout Standard
21875 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21885 height_special "totalheight"
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 This is a minipage.
21892 The text is set in an italic style.
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
21899 another formatting.
21907 \begin_layout Standard
21908 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21911 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
21915 as described in section
21916 \begin_inset space ~
21920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21922 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
21927 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21933 \begin_layout Standard
21934 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21944 height_special "totalheight"
21947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21948 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21949 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21955 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21959 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21969 height_special "totalheight"
21972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21974 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21982 \begin_layout Standard
21983 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
21989 \begin_layout Standard
21990 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
21992 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
21999 \begin_inset space ~
22007 \begin_layout Chapter
22008 Mathematical Formulas
22009 \begin_inset Index idx
22012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22019 \begin_inset Index idx
22022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22053 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22060 \begin_layout Standard
22061 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22066 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22069 \begin_layout Section
22071 \begin_inset Index idx
22074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 \begin_layout Standard
22084 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22091 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22093 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22094 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22095 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22097 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22103 \begin_layout Standard
22104 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22108 \begin_inset space ~
22113 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22116 \begin_layout Standard
22117 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22118 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22121 \begin_layout Standard
22122 This is a line with an inline formula
22123 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22129 \begin_layout Standard
22130 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22131 paragraph, like this one:
22132 \begin_inset Formula
22139 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22142 \begin_layout Standard
22143 LyX supports also many LaTeX math commands.
22145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22149 \begin_inset space \space{}
22153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22166 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22167 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22171 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22174 \begin_inset space ~
22182 \begin_layout Subsection
22183 Navigating in Formulas
22184 \begin_inset Index idx
22187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 \begin_layout Standard
22197 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22198 achieved with the arrow keys.
22199 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22200 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22205 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22206 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22210 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22214 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22217 \end{array}\right]$
22225 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22230 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22231 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22234 \begin_layout Standard
22239 , printed in this document as
22240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22261 \begin_inset Note Note
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
22266 the space character (visible space).
22271 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22272 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22273 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22278 For example, if you want
22279 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 , since in the latter case only the
22336 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22341 will be under the square root sign:
22342 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22348 \begin_layout Standard
22349 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22351 \begin_inset Formula
22353 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22362 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22363 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22366 \begin_layout Subsection
22370 \begin_layout Standard
22371 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22372 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22376 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22377 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22378 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22379 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22380 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22383 \begin_layout Subsection
22384 Exponents and Subscripts
22385 \begin_inset Index idx
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 \begin_inset Index idx
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 \begin_layout Standard
22408 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22411 arg "math-superscript"
22417 arg "math-subscript"
22420 ), but the much easier way is to use a command.
22422 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22425 , type in a formula
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22453 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22457 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22478 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22487 , you have to use an extra
22491 to separate the hat and the character.
22493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22497 \begin_inset space \space{}
22501 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22522 Subscripts are similar: To get
22523 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 \begin_layout Subsection
22548 \begin_inset Index idx
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22560 \begin_layout Standard
22561 Create a fraction with either the command
22570 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22576 \begin_inset space ~
22582 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22583 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22584 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22589 To move back up, press
22594 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22595 \begin_inset Formula
22597 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22600 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22608 \begin_layout Subsection
22610 \begin_inset Index idx
22613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22622 \begin_layout Standard
22623 Roots can be created using the
22626 \begin_inset space ~
22634 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22640 arg "math-insert \\root"
22662 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22668 produces always a square root.
22671 \begin_layout Subsection
22672 Operators with Limits
22673 \begin_inset Index idx
22676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22683 \begin_inset Index idx
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22695 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22702 \begin_layout Standard
22704 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22708 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22711 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22712 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22713 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22714 The sum operator will automatically place its
22715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22722 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and on the side in inline
22725 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22729 \begin_inset Formula
22731 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22736 Integral signs, however, will place the limits on the side in both formula
22740 \begin_layout Standard
22741 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22743 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22744 behind the operator and hitting
22752 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22753 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22755 \begin_inset space ~
22759 \begin_inset space ~
22767 \begin_layout Standard
22768 Certain other mathematical expressions have this
22769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22776 feature as addition, such as
22777 \begin_inset Index idx
22780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 \begin_inset Formula
22789 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22794 which will place the
22795 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22807 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22808 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22814 \begin_layout Standard
22815 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22822 Have a look at section
22823 \begin_inset space ~
22827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22829 reference "sub:Functions"
22833 for an explanation of function macros.
22836 \begin_layout Subsection
22838 \begin_inset Index idx
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22850 \begin_layout Standard
22851 Most math symbols can be found in the
22854 \begin_inset space ~
22859 under one of several categories; including
22876 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22880 \begin_layout Standard
22881 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
22882 you don't have to use the
22885 \begin_inset space ~
22890 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22891 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22894 \begin_layout Subsection
22896 \begin_inset Index idx
22899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22908 \begin_layout Standard
22909 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
22914 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
22920 \begin_inset space ~
22930 arg "math-insert \\space"
22936 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
22937 For example, the sequence
22942 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
22946 \begin_inset Graphics
22947 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
22952 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
22953 the space marker and hit space again several times.
22954 With every space hit the size will be changed.
22955 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
22957 Here are two examples:
22960 \begin_layout Standard
22970 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
22976 \begin_layout Standard
22986 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
22992 \begin_layout Subsection
22994 \begin_inset Index idx
22997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23006 name "sub:Functions"
23013 \begin_layout Standard
23017 \begin_inset space ~
23022 contains under the button
23027 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23032 a number of function macros, such as
23033 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23037 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23045 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23052 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23053 avoid confusions, because
23054 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23058 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23064 \begin_layout Standard
23065 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23067 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23071 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23077 \begin_layout Standard
23078 For some mathematical objects, like the limes, the macro changes where subscript
23079 s are placed, as described in section
23080 \begin_inset space ~
23084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23086 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23093 \begin_layout Subsection
23095 \begin_inset Index idx
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23107 \begin_layout Standard
23108 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23110 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23111 You can also use LaTeX commands to e.
23112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23116 \begin_inset space \space{}
23120 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23123 even if your keyboard doesn't have hat-accents enabled.
23124 Our example is entered by typing
23132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23145 \begin_inset space ~
23149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23151 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23155 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23158 \begin_layout Standard
23159 \begin_inset Float table
23164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23170 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23174 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 \begin_inset Tabular
23185 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23186 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23273 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23435 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23543 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23651 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23705 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23750 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23771 \begin_layout Standard
23772 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23775 \begin_inset space ~
23783 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23786 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23790 \begin_layout Section
23791 Brackets and Delimiters
23792 \begin_inset Index idx
23795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 \begin_inset Index idx
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23814 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23821 \begin_layout Standard
23822 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23823 For some purposes, using just the keys
23828 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23829 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23830 toolbar delimiter icon
23833 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23837 For example, that is how you would construct the brackets around a matrix:
23838 \begin_inset Formula
23840 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23848 and to make it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23849 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23853 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23856 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23862 \begin_inset Formula
23864 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23872 \begin_layout Standard
23873 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23874 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23878 \begin_layout Standard
23879 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23880 left side and right side.
23881 If you use the option
23884 \begin_inset space ~
23889 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23890 The selection will be shown below the button field.
23891 If you want one side to not have a bracket, use the blank button.
23892 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23895 \begin_layout Standard
23896 If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root,
23897 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to
23898 go inside the brackets.
23899 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23904 The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure.
23905 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23906 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23907 For example, to insert a pair of flexible parentheses on both sides, select
23908 the structure and enter
23911 arg "math-delim ( )"
23917 \begin_layout Section
23918 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
23919 \begin_inset Index idx
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23929 \begin_inset Index idx
23932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23939 \begin_inset Index idx
23942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 Math ! Multi-line Equations
23951 \begin_layout Standard
23952 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
23955 \begin_inset space ~
23965 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
23971 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
23972 Here is an example:
23973 \begin_inset Formula
23975 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23984 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
23985 \begin_inset space ~
23989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23991 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23996 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
23997 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
23998 This alignment is set in the box
24003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24051 for every column as default.
24052 For example, the sequence
24053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24064 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24065 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24066 corresponds to the relevant column.
24067 The result will look like this:
24068 \begin_inset Formula
24071 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24072 column & has & has\, right\\
24073 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24082 \begin_layout Standard
24083 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by hitting
24086 arg "newline-insert newline"
24089 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24090 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24092 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24095 or the math toolbar.
24098 \begin_layout Standard
24099 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24100 It can be created with the menu
24102 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24103 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24105 \begin_inset space ~
24117 Here is an example:
24118 \begin_inset Formula
24132 \begin_layout Standard
24133 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24136 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24139 arg "newline-insert newline"
24143 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24148 arg "newline-insert newline"
24151 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24159 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24160 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24161 A new row is created by every further hit of
24164 arg "newline-insert newline"
24168 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24169 Here is an example:
24170 \begin_inset Formula
24172 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24173 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24178 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24179 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24180 \begin_inset Formula
24182 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24190 \begin_layout Standard
24191 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24198 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24199 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24202 reference "eq:asquared"
24207 The other types are described in section
24208 \begin_inset space ~
24212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24214 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24221 \begin_layout Section
24222 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24223 \begin_inset Index idx
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 Math ! Formula numbering
24233 \begin_inset Index idx
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 Math ! Referencing formulas
24243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24245 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24252 \begin_layout Standard
24253 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24255 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24256 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24258 \begin_inset space ~
24266 arg "math-number-toggle"
24270 The formula number appears in LyX as
24271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24278 within parentheses.
24280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24287 denotes that the number will be calculated automatically when the output
24289 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24290 the document class.
24291 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24292 separated by a dot:
24293 \begin_inset Formula
24303 arg "math-number-toggle"
24306 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24307 You can only number displayed formulas.
24310 \begin_layout Standard
24311 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24313 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24314 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24316 \begin_inset space ~
24320 \begin_inset space ~
24324 \begin_inset space ~
24332 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24335 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24336 \begin_inset Formula
24339 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24345 To number all lines use the shortcut
24348 arg "math-number-toggle"
24354 \begin_layout Standard
24355 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24358 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24359 A label is inserted with the menu
24361 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24364 when the cursor is in the formula.
24365 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24366 It is recommended to use the proposed
24367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24378 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24379 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24380 We inserted in the following example the label
24381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24388 in the second line:
24389 \begin_inset Formula
24391 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24392 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24397 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24398 Therefore the label is shown in LyX at the place of the formula number
24400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24408 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24410 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24412 \begin_inset space ~
24418 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24419 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24420 as the formula number:
24423 \begin_layout Standard
24424 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24427 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24434 \begin_layout Standard
24435 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24436 \begin_inset space ~
24440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24442 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24447 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24455 \begin_layout Section
24456 User defined math macros
24457 \begin_inset Index idx
24460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24469 \begin_layout Standard
24470 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24471 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24472 Math macros are explained in section
24475 \begin_inset space ~
24487 \begin_layout Section
24491 \begin_layout Subsection
24493 \begin_inset Index idx
24496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24505 \begin_layout Standard
24506 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24507 To set a font in a formula, use the
24510 \begin_inset space ~
24520 arg "math-insert \\font"
24525 , or enter its command, listed in table
24526 \begin_inset space ~
24530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24532 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24539 \begin_layout Standard
24540 \begin_inset Float table
24545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24546 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24551 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24555 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24565 \begin_inset Tabular
24566 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24567 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24569 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24601 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24628 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24655 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24688 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24715 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24742 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24776 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24837 \begin_layout Standard
24838 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24846 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24862 \begin_layout Standard
24863 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24864 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24869 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24870 space when you need a space in the box.
24871 Here is an example where
24872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24883 denotes the set of numbers:
24884 \begin_inset Formula
24886 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
24894 \begin_layout Standard
24895 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24901 \begin_inset space \space{}
24913 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24917 \begin_inset Newline newline
24920 So it is better not to use this feature.
24923 \begin_layout Standard
24924 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24925 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24929 \begin_inset Newline newline
24932 You can only print them emboldened using the command
24938 , which works like the other typeface commands:
24939 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
24945 \begin_layout Standard
24952 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
24955 \begin_layout Standard
24956 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
24958 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24959 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24961 \begin_inset space ~
24969 \begin_layout Subsection
24971 \begin_inset Index idx
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 \begin_layout Standard
24984 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
24986 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
24990 \begin_inset space ~
24994 \begin_inset space ~
25002 \begin_inset space ~
25012 arg "math-insert \\font"
25024 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25025 You can use spaces and accents in math text like in normal text.
25026 Here is an example:
25027 \begin_inset Formula
25030 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25031 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25040 \begin_layout Subsection
25042 \begin_inset Index idx
25045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 \begin_layout Standard
25055 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25056 automatically chosen in most situations.
25074 For most characters,
25082 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25083 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25088 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25089 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25091 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25096 arg "math-insert \\style"
25102 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25103 For example, you can set
25104 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25107 , which is normally in
25116 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25120 The four styles are used in the following example:
25123 \begin_layout Standard
25124 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25128 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25132 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25136 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25142 \begin_layout Standard
25143 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25144 is set in a particular size with the menu
25146 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25148 \begin_inset space ~
25153 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25154 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25155 will be adjusted to correspond.
25156 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25167 \begin_layout Standard
25171 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25177 \begin_layout Section
25181 \begin_layout Standard
25182 As of LyX 1.6, support for theorem-like environments has been moved out of
25183 the document classes and into layout modules.
25184 \begin_inset Index idx
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 As a result, theorem-like environments can now easily be used with classes
25194 other than the AMS classes.
25196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25198 reference "sub:Modules"
25202 for more on layout modules.
25205 \begin_layout Section
25207 \begin_inset Index idx
25210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25217 \begin_inset Index idx
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 \begin_layout Standard
25230 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25231 (AMS) that are in common use.
25234 \begin_layout Subsection
25235 Enabling AMS-Support
25238 \begin_layout Standard
25239 Selecting the checkbox
25242 \begin_inset space ~
25246 \begin_inset space ~
25250 \begin_inset space ~
25257 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25261 \begin_inset Index idx
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25265 Document ! Settings
25273 \begin_inset space ~
25278 will include the AMS-packages in the document and make the facilities available.
25279 AMS is needed for many math-constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25280 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25283 \begin_layout Subsection
25285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25287 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25292 \begin_inset Index idx
25295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25304 \begin_layout Standard
25305 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25306 LyX allows you to choose between
25327 We refer to the AMS-documentation for an explanation of these formula types.
25330 \begin_layout Chapter
25334 \begin_layout Section
25336 \begin_inset Index idx
25339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25348 name "sec:Cross-References"
25355 \begin_layout Standard
25356 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25357 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25359 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25360 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25361 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25364 \begin_layout Enumerate
25368 \begin_layout Enumerate
25369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25371 name "enu:Second-item"
25378 \begin_layout Enumerate
25382 \begin_layout Standard
25383 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25385 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25388 or by pressing the toolbar button
25395 A gray label box like this:
25396 \begin_inset Graphics
25397 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25402 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25403 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25438 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted, e.
25439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25443 \begin_inset space \space{}
25446 if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix will
25448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25462 \begin_layout Standard
25463 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25465 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25468 or the toolbar button
25471 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25475 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25476 \begin_inset Graphics
25477 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25482 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25484 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25497 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25501 \begin_layout Standard
25504 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25507 , you can right-click on a label and use in the appearing context menu
25512 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25513 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25515 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25527 \begin_layout Standard
25528 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25529 \begin_inset space ~
25533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25535 reference "enu:Second-item"
25542 \begin_layout Standard
25543 It is recommended to use a protected space
25547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25548 described in section
25549 \begin_inset space ~
25553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25555 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25564 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25565 line breaks between them.
25568 \begin_layout Standard
25569 There are six formats of cross-references:
25572 \begin_layout Description
25573 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25576 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25583 \begin_layout Description
25584 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25585 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25597 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25604 \begin_layout Description
25605 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25606 \begin_inset space ~
25610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25611 LatexCommand pageref
25612 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25619 \begin_layout Description
25621 \begin_inset space ~
25625 \begin_inset space ~
25628 <page>: prints the text "on page" and the page number:
25629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25630 LatexCommand vpageref
25631 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25638 \begin_layout Description
25640 \begin_inset space ~
25644 \begin_inset space ~
25648 \begin_inset space ~
25651 <page>: prints the number, the text "on page", and the page number:
25652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25654 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25661 \begin_layout Description
25663 \begin_inset space ~
25666 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25667 \begin_inset Newline newline
25671 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25679 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25688 \begin_inset Index idx
25691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25692 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25698 \begin_inset Index idx
25701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25702 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25713 \begin_inset Newline newline
25716 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25719 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25723 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25724 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25732 is the default and preferred because
25736 supports only English documents.
25737 The format is specified by using the command
25749 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25750 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25763 ) can be done with this command
25764 \begin_inset Newline newline
25771 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25776 \begin_inset Newline newline
25779 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25781 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25783 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25790 \begin_layout Description
25792 \begin_inset space ~
25795 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25797 LatexCommand nameref
25798 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25805 \begin_layout Standard
25810 will not print the page number if the label is on the previous, the same,
25813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25817 \begin_inset space \space{}
25821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25835 <reference> on page <page>
25837 will not print anything about the page if the label is on the same page.
25840 \begin_layout Standard
25841 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25842 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
25843 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25847 of the cross-reference window, that appear when you click on the cross-referenc
25851 \begin_layout Standard
25852 You can only use the style
25856 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25860 is always possible.
25863 \begin_layout Standard
25864 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25865 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25867 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25868 \begin_inset space ~
25872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25874 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25886 \begin_inset space ~
25890 \begin_inset space ~
25895 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25896 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25899 \begin_inset space ~
25904 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25905 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25908 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25914 \begin_layout Standard
25915 You can change labels at any time.
25916 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25917 do not need to think about this.
25920 \begin_layout Standard
25921 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see two question
25922 marks in the output instead of the reference.
25925 \begin_layout Standard
25926 References are described in detail in sec.
25927 \begin_inset space ~
25931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25941 \begin_inset space ~
25949 \begin_layout Section
25950 Table of Contents and other Listings
25951 \begin_inset Index idx
25954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25961 \begin_inset Index idx
25964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25980 \begin_layout Subsection
25982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25984 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
25991 \begin_layout Standard
25992 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
25994 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25995 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25997 \begin_inset space ~
26001 \begin_inset space ~
26007 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26008 If you click on it, the
26012 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26013 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26014 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26016 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26019 that is described in sec.
26020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26026 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26033 \begin_layout Standard
26034 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26035 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26037 \begin_inset space ~
26041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26043 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26047 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26049 \begin_inset space ~
26053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26055 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26059 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26061 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26064 \begin_layout Subsection
26065 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26068 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26075 \begin_layout Standard
26076 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26077 You can insert them via the
26079 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26081 \begin_inset space ~
26085 \begin_inset space ~
26091 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26094 \begin_layout Section
26095 URLs and Hyperlinks
26096 \begin_inset Index idx
26099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26106 \begin_inset Index idx
26109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26118 \begin_layout Subsection
26120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26129 \begin_layout Standard
26130 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26132 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26138 \begin_layout Standard
26139 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26140 \begin_inset Flex URL
26143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26153 \begin_layout Standard
26154 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26160 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26164 \begin_layout Standard
26165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26173 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26181 \begin_layout Subsection
26183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26185 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26192 \begin_layout Standard
26193 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26195 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26198 or with the toolbar button
26205 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26214 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26215 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26216 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26218 name "LyX's homepage"
26219 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26223 , an Email address like this:
26224 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26226 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26227 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26232 , or a link to a file.
26235 \begin_layout Standard
26236 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26249 to the link target.
26252 \begin_layout Standard
26253 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26254 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26255 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26256 the text style dialog.
26257 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26261 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26263 name "LyX's homepage"
26264 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26271 \begin_layout Standard
26272 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26276 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26278 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26279 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26283 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26285 \begin_inset Newline newline
26293 \begin_inset Newline newline
26300 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26303 \begin_layout Section
26305 \begin_inset Index idx
26308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26317 name "sec:Appendices"
26324 \begin_layout Standard
26325 Appendices are created with the menu
26327 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26329 \begin_inset space ~
26333 \begin_inset space ~
26339 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26340 as the appendix region.
26341 The region is marked with a red borderline.
26344 \begin_layout Standard
26345 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix region is treated as an appendix,
26346 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26347 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26348 and the subsection number.
26349 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26353 \begin_layout Standard
26355 \begin_inset space ~
26359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26361 reference "chap:Credits"
26366 \begin_inset space ~
26370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26372 reference "sub:Export"
26379 \begin_layout Section
26381 \begin_inset Index idx
26384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26393 name "sec:Bibliography"
26400 \begin_layout Standard
26401 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26402 You can include a bibliography database,
26406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26407 Known under the name
26408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26420 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26421 manually, using the paragraph environment
26425 , which was described in section
26426 \begin_inset space ~
26430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26432 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26437 If you want anything other than numerical citations that are used in this
26438 document, like author-year citations, then you must
26442 use a bibliography database.
26445 \begin_layout Subsection
26446 The Bibliography Environment
26449 \begin_layout Standard
26454 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26456 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26465 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26467 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26476 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26479 \begin_layout Standard
26480 You can refer to the key of a bibliography entry using the menu
26482 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26485 or the toolbar button
26488 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26492 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26493 in which you can select one or more keys in the available key list.
26494 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key.
26495 When you click on the box, the citation window appears and you can change
26499 \begin_layout Standard
26500 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26501 entry with surrounding brackets.
26506 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26507 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26519 \begin_layout Standard
26522 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26527 key "latexcompanion"
26534 \begin_layout Standard
26535 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26545 \begin_layout Subsection
26546 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26547 \begin_inset Index idx
26550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26551 Bibliography ! Databases
26557 \begin_inset Index idx
26560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26561 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26569 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26576 \begin_layout Standard
26577 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26583 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26585 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26586 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26591 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26593 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26594 your working field in a database.
26595 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26596 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26597 list for that document.
26598 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26602 \begin_layout Standard
26603 The database is a text file with the file extension
26604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26615 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26616 The format is explained in
26617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26623 and in LaTeX books (
26624 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26626 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26631 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26632 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26633 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26634 \begin_inset Flex URL
26637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26639 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26647 \begin_layout Standard
26648 To use a database, use the menu
26650 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26655 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26668 \begin_inset space ~
26674 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26675 In this window you can load one or more databases and a style file.
26678 Add bibliography to TOC
26680 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26685 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26686 in the document or just the cited references.
26689 \begin_layout Standard
26690 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26702 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26703 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26704 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26706 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26712 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26713 \begin_inset Newline newline
26717 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26719 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26731 \begin_layout Standard
26732 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26735 \begin_layout Standard
26736 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26737 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the processor
26738 either in the document settings under
26742 or in LyX's preferences under
26744 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26759 The following variants are possible:
26762 \begin_layout Description
26763 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, does not work with
26764 other bibliography packages (like e.
26765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26769 \begin_inset space ~
26776 ), only with the package
26780 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26784 \begin_layout Description
26785 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26786 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26787 with all bibliography packages, except of
26792 \begin_layout Description
26793 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in a 8-bit encoding,
26798 , works with all bibliography packages
26801 \begin_layout Standard
26802 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26804 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended to read the manual of
26810 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26819 \begin_layout Standard
26820 When you select the option
26822 Sectioned bibliography
26826 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26829 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26830 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26832 Customizing Bibliographies
26840 Additional Features
26845 \begin_layout Standard
26846 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26847 the two methods of creating them.
26848 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26849 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26850 We used the style file
26854 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26857 \begin_layout Subsection
26858 Bibliography layout
26859 \begin_inset Index idx
26862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26863 Bibliography ! Layout
26871 \begin_layout Standard
26872 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26873 For this feature you need to enable the option
26879 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26883 \begin_inset Index idx
26886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26887 Document ! Settings
26897 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26898 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
26899 in the previous section.
26902 \begin_layout Standard
26903 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26904 the citation reference window.
26905 Here is an example where the text
26906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26910 \begin_inset space ~
26914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26917 appears after the reference:
26920 \begin_layout Standard
26922 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26925 key "latexcompanion"
26932 \begin_layout Section
26934 \begin_inset Index idx
26937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26953 \begin_layout Standard
26954 An index entry is created if you use the menu
26956 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26958 \begin_inset space ~
26963 or the toolbar button
26970 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
26971 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
26972 by LyX as the index entry.
26975 \begin_layout Standard
26976 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
26978 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26980 \begin_inset space ~
26984 \begin_inset space ~
26987 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26989 \begin_inset space ~
26995 A light blue box labeled
26996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27007 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27008 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27011 \begin_layout Standard
27012 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27013 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27017 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27024 \begin_layout Subsection
27025 Grouping Index Entries
27026 \begin_inset Index idx
27029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27038 \begin_layout Standard
27039 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27041 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27042 lists under the entry
27043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27051 First we create the entry
27052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27060 \begin_inset space ~
27064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27066 reference "sub:Lists"
27071 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27072 \begin_inset space ~
27076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27078 reference "sec:Itemize"
27082 , we insert the command
27085 \begin_layout Standard
27091 \begin_layout Standard
27095 \begin_layout Standard
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27102 for the enumerated list in section
27103 \begin_inset space ~
27107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27109 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27117 The exclamation mark
27118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27125 marks the grouping levels.
27126 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27127 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27128 If we don't have an index entry for
27129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27136 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27139 \begin_layout Subsection
27141 \begin_inset Index idx
27144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27145 Index ! Page ranges
27153 \begin_layout Standard
27154 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27156 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27162 \begin_inset space \space{}
27165 if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create an index entry
27167 \begin_inset space ~
27171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27173 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27180 \begin_layout Standard
27183 Paragraph environments|(
27186 \begin_layout Standard
27187 and another entry at the end of section
27188 \begin_inset space ~
27192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27194 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27201 \begin_layout Standard
27204 Paragraph environments|)
27207 \begin_layout Standard
27209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27232 respectively start and end the index range.
27233 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27234 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27235 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27236 An example is the index entry
27237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27240 Document ! Settings
27241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27247 \begin_layout Subsection
27249 \begin_inset Index idx
27252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27253 Index ! Cross referencing
27261 \begin_layout Standard
27262 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27263 We referred for example in the index entry
27264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27272 \begin_inset space ~
27276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27278 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27282 ) to the index entry
27283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27290 in the same section using the entry
27293 \begin_layout Standard
27296 GIF|see{Image formats}
27299 \begin_layout Standard
27300 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27301 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27302 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27305 \begin_layout Subsection
27307 \begin_inset Index idx
27310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27311 Index ! Entry order
27319 \begin_layout Standard
27320 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27321 follow the rules for the index order.
27322 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27327 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27329 \begin_inset space ~
27333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27335 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27344 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27345 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27370 \begin_inset Index idx
27373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 Dummy entries ! maïs
27380 \begin_inset Index idx
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27384 Dummy entries ! maître
27390 \begin_inset Index idx
27393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27394 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27399 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27400 maïs, maison, maître.
27401 To achieve this, we use the command
27404 \begin_layout Standard
27407 previous entry@current entry
27410 \begin_layout Standard
27411 In our case we want to have
27412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27427 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27430 \begin_layout Standard
27436 \begin_layout Standard
27437 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27438 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27439 See the next subsection for an example.
27442 \begin_layout Standard
27443 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27449 \begin_layout Standard
27450 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27455 to generate the index (see sec.
27456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27462 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27471 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27479 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27483 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27484 index commands start with
27485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27497 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27502 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27505 \begin_layout Standard
27517 \begin_layout Standard
27529 \begin_layout Subsection
27531 \begin_inset Index idx
27534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27535 Index ! Entry layout
27543 \begin_layout Standard
27544 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27545 \begin_inset Index idx
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27551 This is an italic dummy entry
27556 You can also format the page number using the character
27557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27564 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27565 We can write for example
27568 \begin_layout Standard
27571 italic page number:|textit
27574 \begin_layout Standard
27575 to get the page number in italic.
27576 \begin_inset Index idx
27579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27580 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27585 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27603 \begin_inset space ~
27609 Have a look at section
27610 \begin_inset space ~
27614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27616 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27620 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27623 \begin_layout Standard
27624 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27632 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27636 to generate the index, see sec.
27637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27643 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27652 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27657 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27658 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27661 key "latexcompanion"
27673 \begin_layout Standard
27674 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27676 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27677 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27678 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27679 If so, put the following in the preamble
27682 \begin_layout Standard
27694 \begin_layout Standard
27698 \begin_layout Standard
27704 \begin_layout Standard
27705 in the index entry.
27706 \begin_inset Index idx
27709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27710 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27715 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27716 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27717 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27720 \begin_layout Standard
27721 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27727 \begin_inset space \space{}
27730 we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get a bold font
27731 for all index entries.
27732 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27744 documentation for details,
27745 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27747 key "makeindex,xindy"
27754 \begin_layout Subsection
27756 \begin_inset Index idx
27759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27768 name "sub:Index-Program"
27775 \begin_layout Standard
27776 If the index entry program
27780 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27784 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27793 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27794 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27795 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27796 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27797 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27807 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27808 dialog, see section
27809 \begin_inset space ~
27813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27815 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27820 The available options are listed and explained in
27821 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27823 key "makeindex,xindy"
27828 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27832 \begin_layout Standard
27833 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27834 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27837 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27838 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27842 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27843 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27846 \begin_layout Subsection
27850 \begin_layout Standard
27851 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27852 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27860 next to the standard index.
27861 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27862 that add this feature.
27868 \begin_inset Index idx
27871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27872 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
27877 package to generate multiple indexes.
27878 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
27882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27883 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
27884 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27891 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
27892 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27893 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27901 \begin_layout Standard
27902 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27904 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27905 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27908 and select the option
27910 Use multiple Indexes
27917 already contains the standard index
27918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27926 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27927 also appear as a heading) to the
27931 input field and press the
27936 The new index now also appears in the list.
27937 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
27941 \begin_layout Standard
27942 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27945 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27947 \begin_inset space ~
27951 \begin_inset space ~
27960 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
27961 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
27962 are additional features:
27965 \begin_layout Itemize
27966 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
27967 on the entries' label will open a dialog where you can do that.
27970 \begin_layout Itemize
27971 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
27972 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
27973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27981 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
27983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27986 g., if you use a book class, where the standard index heading is defined
27987 as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested
27988 to the non-subindexes.
27991 \begin_layout Section
27992 Nomenclature / Glossary
27993 \begin_inset Index idx
27996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28003 \begin_inset Index idx
28006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28037 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28044 \begin_layout Standard
28045 Sometimes you need to compile a list of symbols that are mentioned in your
28046 document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or
28050 \begin_layout Standard
28051 To be able to create nomenclatures, you need the LaTeX package
28056 \begin_inset Index idx
28059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28060 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28066 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28067 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28073 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28076 \begin_layout Standard
28077 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28078 and then use the menu
28080 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28086 \begin_inset space ~
28091 or the toolbar button
28094 arg "nomencl-insert"
28099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28110 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28113 \begin_layout Standard
28114 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28115 The first is the symbol that you want to refer to.
28116 The second is the description of the symbol.
28119 \begin_layout Standard
28120 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28128 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28136 \begin_layout Subsection
28137 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28138 \begin_inset Index idx
28141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28142 Nomenclature ! Layout
28150 \begin_layout Standard
28151 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28155 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28161 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28169 \begin_inset Newline newline
28177 \begin_inset Newline newline
28183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28190 character starts/ends the formula.
28191 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28203 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28213 \begin_layout Standard
28214 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28215 \begin_inset space ~
28219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28221 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28228 \begin_layout Standard
28232 \begin_inset space ~
28237 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28238 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28243 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28250 in this document is:
28251 \begin_inset Newline newline
28256 dummy entry for the character
28261 \begin_inset Newline newline
28273 \begin_inset space ~
28283 font use the command
28312 \begin_layout Standard
28313 If the characters |
28314 \begin_inset space \space{}
28318 \begin_inset space \space{}
28322 \begin_inset space \space{}
28326 \begin_inset space \space{}
28330 \begin_inset space \space{}
28333 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28334 a quote character in front of them.
28335 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28336 LatexCommand nomenclature
28337 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28338 description "The quote sign is output by writing ' \"\"\"\" '"
28345 \begin_layout Subsection
28346 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28347 \begin_inset Index idx
28350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28351 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28359 \begin_layout Standard
28360 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28361 the symbol definition.
28362 This leads to undesired results when you for example have symbols in formulas.
28363 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28366 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28367 LatexCommand nomenclature
28369 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28376 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28380 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28381 LatexCommand nomenclature
28384 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28389 They will be sorted by
28390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28416 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28419 will be sorted before the
28423 since the character
28424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28431 is considered in sorting.
28434 \begin_layout Standard
28435 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28438 \begin_inset space ~
28443 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28444 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28446 For the example given, you can insert
28450 in this field for the
28451 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28458 will be located before
28459 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28465 \begin_layout Standard
28466 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28471 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28480 \begin_layout Subsection
28481 Nomenclature Options
28482 \begin_inset Index idx
28485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28486 Nomenclature ! Options
28494 \begin_layout Standard
28499 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28500 Here are some of its options, for more have a look at its documentation:
28503 \begin_layout Description
28504 refeq Appends the phrase
28505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28520 to every nomenclature entry, where
28526 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28529 \begin_layout Description
28530 refpage Appends the phrase
28531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28546 to every nomenclature entry, where
28552 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28555 \begin_layout Description
28556 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28559 \begin_layout Standard
28560 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28561 class options list in the
28563 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28567 In this document the options
28574 \begin_layout Standard
28575 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28581 \begin_layout Standard
28582 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28583 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28588 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28591 \begin_layout Description
28601 \begin_layout Description
28604 nomrefpage Like the
28611 \begin_layout Description
28614 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28623 \begin_layout Description
28627 \begin_inset space ~
28633 \begin_inset space ~
28638 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28641 \begin_layout Standard
28643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28650 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28651 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28654 \begin_layout Standard
28662 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28665 \begin_inset Newline newline
28672 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28677 \begin_inset Newline newline
28681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28696 by their translation.
28699 \begin_layout Subsection
28700 Printing the Nomenclature
28701 \begin_inset Index idx
28704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28705 Nomenclature ! Printing
28713 \begin_layout Standard
28714 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28716 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28718 \begin_inset space ~
28722 \begin_inset space ~
28725 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28741 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28742 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28743 You can choose between these settings:
28746 \begin_layout Description
28747 Default a space of 1
28748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28754 \begin_layout Description
28756 \begin_inset space ~
28760 \begin_inset space ~
28763 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28766 \begin_layout Description
28767 Custom custom space
28770 \begin_layout Standard
28771 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28788 For example, in order to change the name to
28792 , add the following line to the preamble:
28795 \begin_layout Standard
28803 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28806 \begin_layout Subsection
28807 Nomenclature Program
28808 \begin_inset Index idx
28811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28812 Nomenclature ! Program
28818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28820 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28827 \begin_layout Standard
28828 LyX uses the program
28832 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28833 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28838 by adding options, see section
28839 \begin_inset space ~
28843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28845 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28850 The available options are listed and explained in
28851 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28853 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28860 \begin_layout Section
28862 \begin_inset Index idx
28865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28872 \begin_inset Index idx
28875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28876 Document ! Branches
28882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28884 name "sec:Branches"
28891 \begin_layout Standard
28892 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28893 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28894 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28895 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28898 \begin_layout Standard
28899 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
28900 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28901 To create a branch, either select the menu
28903 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28904 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28907 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28909 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28916 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28917 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28918 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
28919 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28920 (see below for an example).
28921 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28922 to the name of the other) and to add
28923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28935 \begin_inset space ~
28938 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28939 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28942 \begin_layout Standard
28943 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28944 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28946 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28949 where you can choose a branch.
28950 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28954 \begin_layout Standard
28955 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28956 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
28959 \begin_layout Standard
28960 \begin_inset Branch Question
28963 \begin_layout Standard
28964 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
28972 \begin_layout Standard
28973 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28976 \begin_layout Standard
28977 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
28985 \begin_layout Standard
28992 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28993 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28996 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
28997 Consider for example a file
28998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29005 which has the above branches.
29007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29014 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29038 branch were inactive,
29039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29054 branch was active, likewise
29055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29070 branch was active, and
29071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29074 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29078 if both branches were active.
29079 This helps you to easily export different versions of your document without
29083 \begin_layout Standard
29084 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29090 \begin_layout Standard
29091 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29092 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29094 For example you can define for the question branch
29098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29099 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29100 \begin_inset space ~
29104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29106 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29118 \begin_layout Standard
29128 \begin_layout Standard
29138 \begin_layout Standard
29139 and for the answer branch
29142 \begin_layout Standard
29152 \begin_layout Standard
29162 \begin_layout Standard
29163 \begin_inset Branch Question
29166 \begin_layout Standard
29170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29198 \begin_layout Standard
29199 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29202 \begin_layout Standard
29206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29234 \begin_layout Standard
29235 Now it is possible to use the commands
29239 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29246 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29249 to obtain conditional output.
29250 Here is an example formula where only the
29257 \begin_inset Formula
29259 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29267 \begin_layout Standard
29268 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29274 \change_inserted 5863208 1334492666
29278 \begin_layout Standard
29280 \change_inserted 5863208 1334493356
29281 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29283 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29284 For this advanced usage, please study Customization manual (in particular
29286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29289 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29298 \begin_layout Section
29300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29302 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29307 \begin_inset Index idx
29310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29324 dialog allows you in the
29328 to set up special options for the PDF output of your document.
29329 All options there are provided by the LaTeX-package
29334 \begin_inset Index idx
29337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29338 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29346 \begin_layout Standard
29351 will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29352 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29353 table of contents entry or on a reference and he is shown the referenced
29355 You can specify in the dialog tab
29359 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29361 The backreferences will appear in the bibliography behind the different
29362 entries, showing the number of the section, slide, or page where the entry
29366 \begin_layout Standard
29371 you can set if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of your
29372 document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29373 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29375 With the open bookmarks level you can specify what sectioning level should
29376 be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
29378 \begin_inset space ~
29381 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29382 \begin_inset space ~
29385 1 will only display the sections.
29388 \begin_layout Standard
29389 The header information in the dialog tab
29393 are saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29394 Many programs are able to extract this information to e.
29395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29399 \begin_inset space \space{}
29402 automatically recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29403 This is very useful to sort, classify, or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29406 Automatic fill header
29408 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29409 title and author settings.
29412 \begin_layout Standard
29415 Load in fullscreen mode
29417 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29420 \begin_layout Standard
29421 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29422 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29428 For an explanation of them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29438 \begin_layout Section
29439 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29442 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29449 \begin_layout Subsection
29451 \begin_inset Index idx
29454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29463 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29470 \begin_layout Standard
29471 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29472 constructs, but not all.
29473 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29474 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29475 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29476 is for every problem a LaTeX-package.
29477 But LyX can of course not be up to date and support all packages and their
29481 \begin_layout Standard
29482 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29484 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29486 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29488 \begin_inset space ~
29493 or by the toolbar button
29506 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29514 \begin_layout Standard
29515 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29516 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29517 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29518 using the LaTeX-command
29524 , you can write the command part
29530 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29534 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29535 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29536 the following example:
29539 \begin_layout Standard
29540 \begin_inset Graphics
29541 filename clipart/ERT.png
29549 \begin_layout Standard
29553 \begin_layout Standard
29554 This is a line with a
29558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29581 \begin_layout Standard
29582 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29590 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29591 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29599 \begin_layout Subsection
29600 Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29601 \begin_inset Argument 1
29604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29611 \begin_inset Index idx
29614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29623 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29630 \begin_layout Standard
29631 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29632 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29633 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29642 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29643 any time if you know the right commands.
29645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29649 \begin_inset space \space{}
29652 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the
29654 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29655 all caption labels bold.
29656 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29658 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29662 \begin_layout Standard
29663 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29664 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29665 First you have to find out which and therefore look into the LaTeX package
29667 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29676 \begin_layout Standard
29677 As result you find that the package
29682 \begin_inset Index idx
29685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29686 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29692 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29694 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29700 \begin_layout Standard
29705 usepackage[options]{package name}
29708 \begin_layout Standard
29709 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29710 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29711 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29714 \begin_layout Standard
29715 In your case the package name is
29720 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29725 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29726 So you add the command
29729 \begin_layout Standard
29734 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29737 \begin_layout Standard
29738 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29743 For more commands provided by the
29747 package, have a look at its documentation,
29748 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29762 \begin_layout Standard
29763 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29765 For example if you use a
29769 class, you don't need the package
29773 , you can instead write
29776 \begin_layout Standard
29781 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29786 \begin_layout Standard
29787 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29788 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29789 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29796 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29799 \begin_layout Standard
29800 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29801 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29803 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29804 the previous section.
29807 \begin_layout Standard
29808 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29810 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29812 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29819 \begin_layout Standard
29820 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29826 \begin_layout Standard
29830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29840 \begin_inset Note Note
29843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29844 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29852 \begin_layout Left Header
29853 \begin_inset Argument 1
29856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29876 \begin_inset Note Note
29879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29880 defines the header line as described below
29888 \begin_layout Center Header
29889 \begin_inset Argument 1
29892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29901 \begin_layout Right Header
29902 \begin_inset Argument 1
29905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29926 \begin_layout Left Footer
29927 \begin_inset Argument 1
29930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29951 \begin_layout Center Footer
29952 \begin_inset Argument 1
29955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29966 \begin_inset Newline newline
29970 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
29976 \begin_layout Right Footer
29977 \begin_inset Argument 1
29980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30002 \begin_layout Section
30003 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30006 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30011 \begin_inset Index idx
30014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30015 Document ! Header/Footer line
30021 \begin_inset Index idx
30024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30033 \begin_layout Standard
30034 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30035 to set the headings style to
30041 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30047 \begin_inset space ~
30053 As a second step add in the menu
30055 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30056 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30063 Custom Header/Footerlines
30064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30068 This module offers the following 6
30069 \begin_inset space ~
30075 \begin_layout Description
30077 \begin_inset space ~
30081 \begin_inset space ~
30085 \begin_inset space ~
30089 \begin_inset space ~
30093 \begin_inset space ~
30099 \begin_layout Description
30101 \begin_inset space ~
30105 \begin_inset space ~
30109 \begin_inset space ~
30113 \begin_inset space ~
30117 \begin_inset space ~
30123 \begin_layout Standard
30124 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30127 \begin_layout Standard
30128 Normally, headers and footers are set up in the beginning of the document.
30129 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30131 \begin_inset space ~
30135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30137 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30141 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30144 \begin_layout Standard
30145 \begin_inset Float figure
30151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30154 \begin_inset Tabular
30155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30156 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30157 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30159 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30179 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30208 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30219 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30223 The normal text on the page goes here.
30224 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30226 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30227 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30232 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30241 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30270 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30281 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30299 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30317 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30322 name "fig:Page-layout"
30326 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30339 \begin_layout Subsection
30343 \begin_layout Standard
30344 To define your header line, add all 3
30345 \begin_inset space ~
30349 The things you add to the styles appear on uneven pages, the things in
30350 the optional arguments on even pages.
30351 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30353 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30354 Defining the footer line works similar.
30357 \begin_layout Standard
30358 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30361 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30374 \begin_inset space ~
30382 \begin_layout Description
30385 thepage prints the current page number
30388 \begin_layout Description
30391 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30394 \begin_layout Description
30397 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30400 \begin_layout Description
30403 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30404 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30411 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30414 because it usually goes in a left header.
30417 \begin_layout Description
30420 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30421 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30423 It is normally used in the right header.
30426 \begin_layout Subsection
30427 Default header/footer
30430 \begin_layout Standard
30431 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30432 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30433 footer has the page number.
30434 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30435 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30436 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30439 \begin_inset space ~
30447 \begin_layout Subsection
30451 \begin_layout Standard
30452 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30453 Some pages are different.
30454 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30455 a new part or chapter in your book.
30456 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30457 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30458 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30461 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30462 Header and footer decoration line
30465 \begin_layout Standard
30466 By default, you get a 0.4
30467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30470 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30471 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30483 in the following scheme:
30486 \begin_layout Standard
30493 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30496 \begin_layout Standard
30497 Where thickness is a size in standard units like
30506 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30513 \begin_layout Standard
30514 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30515 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30516 \begin_inset space ~
30520 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30530 Several header/footer lines
30533 \begin_layout Standard
30534 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30535 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30536 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30538 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30550 in this scheme in your document preamble:
30553 \begin_layout Standard
30560 headheight}{height}
30563 \begin_layout Standard
30564 Where height is a size in standard units.
30565 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30566 your header/footer and preview your document as PDF.
30567 Then open the LaTeX logfile via the menu
30569 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30583 and look via the button
30586 \begin_inset space ~
30591 if you find a warning of the package
30596 \begin_inset Index idx
30599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30600 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30606 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30607 for your header/footer.
30610 \begin_layout Subsection
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30615 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30616 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30617 This example consists of the following definition:
30620 \begin_layout Description
30622 \begin_inset space ~
30631 , empty optional argument
30634 \begin_layout Description
30636 \begin_inset space ~
30639 Header empty, empty optional argument
30642 \begin_layout Description
30644 \begin_inset space ~
30653 in the optional argument
30656 \begin_layout Description
30658 \begin_inset space ~
30667 in the optional argument
30670 \begin_layout Description
30672 \begin_inset space ~
30684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30688 \begin_inset Newline newline
30692 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30699 in the optional argument
30702 \begin_layout Description
30704 \begin_inset space ~
30713 , empty optional argument
30716 \begin_layout Description
30719 headrulewidth set to 2
30720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30726 \begin_layout Standard
30727 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30728 For more special things like e.
30729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30733 \begin_inset space ~
30736 thumb-indexes, see the manual of the
30741 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30750 \begin_layout Standard
30751 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30757 \begin_layout Standard
30761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30765 pagestyle{headings}
30771 \begin_inset Note Note
30774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30775 switches back to page style with the default headings
30783 \begin_layout Section
30784 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30787 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30792 \begin_inset Index idx
30795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30802 \begin_inset Index idx
30805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30814 \begin_layout Standard
30815 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
30816 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30817 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30820 \begin_layout Subsection
30824 \begin_layout Standard
30825 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
30830 \begin_inset Index idx
30833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30834 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
30839 (on some systems named simply
30844 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
30846 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30852 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
30853 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30861 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
30862 automatically installed together with LyX.
30865 \begin_layout Subsection
30869 \begin_layout Standard
30870 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
30871 LaTeX, activate the option
30874 \begin_inset space ~
30881 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30887 \begin_inset space ~
30891 \begin_inset space ~
30894 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30901 \begin_inset space ~
30914 \begin_inset space ~
30919 is the multiplication factor for the size.
30922 \begin_layout Standard
30923 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
30927 \begin_layout Standard
30928 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30936 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
30937 generated by activating the option
30940 \begin_inset space ~
30946 Reopening the documents will fix such problems.
30954 \begin_layout Subsection
30955 Selected document parts
30958 \begin_layout Standard
30959 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
30960 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
30961 that are not yet supported by LyX.
30962 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
30964 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30968 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
30969 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
30970 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
30973 \begin_layout Standard
30974 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
30980 which is not yet supported by LyX.
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30991 is explained in section
30993 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
30998 \begin_inset space ~
31008 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31009 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31011 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31013 Here is the result:
31016 \begin_layout Standard
31017 \begin_inset Preview
31019 \begin_layout Standard
31024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31028 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31034 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31044 height_special "totalheight"
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31072 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31078 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31100 \begin_layout Standard
31101 Previewing works also for colors.
31102 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31120 is explained in section
31127 \begin_inset space ~
31140 \begin_layout Standard
31141 \begin_inset Preview
31143 \begin_layout Standard
31147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31171 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31190 \begin_layout Standard
31191 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31197 \begin_layout Standard
31198 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31199 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31200 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31202 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31203 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31204 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31205 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31209 \begin_layout Subsection
31213 \begin_layout Standard
31214 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31217 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31219 \begin_inset space ~
31224 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31225 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph where the cursor is
31227 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31228 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31229 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31230 the source view window.
31233 \begin_layout Section
31234 Advanced Find and Replace
31235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31237 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31242 \begin_inset Index idx
31245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31252 \begin_inset Index idx
31255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31264 \begin_layout Subsection
31268 \begin_layout Standard
31269 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31270 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31271 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31272 The key-features are:
31275 \begin_layout Itemize
31276 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31277 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31278 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31282 \begin_layout Itemize
31283 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31284 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31285 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31286 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31289 \begin_layout Itemize
31290 Search may be widened to a specific
31295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31299 \begin_inset space ~
31302 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31303 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31310 \begin_layout Itemize
31311 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31312 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31317 \begin_inset space ~
31320 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31323 \begin_layout Subsection
31327 \begin_layout Standard
31328 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31330 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31343 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31346 ) or the toolbar button
31349 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31355 Advanced Find and Replace
31360 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31364 \begin_layout Standard
31369 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31374 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31377 arg "break-paragraph"
31381 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31382 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31383 Pressing repeatedly
31386 arg "break-paragraph"
31389 keeps searching forward while pressing
31393 searches backwards.
31396 \begin_layout Standard
31401 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31411 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31414 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31415 Searching for mathematics
31418 \begin_layout Standard
31419 Mathematical formulas may be searched for by typing them the
31424 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31427 or also something more complex like
31428 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31432 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31433 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31434 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31435 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31445 \begin_layout Standard
31446 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31447 This is done by switching to the
31451 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31456 This way, entering in the
31463 \begin_layout Itemize
31464 a plain word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring
31465 in emphasized or boldface.
31468 \begin_layout Itemize
31469 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31470 instances with same face only, and within the same text style only.
31473 \begin_layout Itemize
31474 a plain word in a section heading, and searching for it, finds occurrences
31475 of if only within section headings.
31476 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31477 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31481 \begin_layout Itemize
31482 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31483 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31490 \begin_layout Standard
31491 The document segments entered in the
31495 editor can be replaced with the text segments entered in the
31503 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31507 button or alternatively
31514 arg "break-paragraph"
31521 while the cursor is in the
31531 \begin_layout Standard
31532 You can replace with full-featured formatted LyX segments.
31533 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability may be (just to mention
31537 \begin_layout Itemize
31538 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31539 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31547 with its typewriter version
31548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31562 \begin_layout Itemize
31563 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31569 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31581 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31588 (you may want to enable the
31596 options and disable the
31604 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31612 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31613 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31617 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
31620 , or occurrences of
31621 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31625 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31631 \begin_layout Subsection
31635 \begin_layout Standard
31636 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31641 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31643 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31645 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31654 You can search for regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31660 This is done via the menu
31662 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31663 Insert Regular Expression
31665 while the cursor is in the
31670 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31671 expression matching rules
31675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31676 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
31678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31682 \begin_inset space ~
31685 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
31686 to match expressions.
31691 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31692 same text in the document.
31693 It is allowed to cut and paste regexp-mode insets as usual.
31694 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31697 \begin_layout Enumerate
31698 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31703 editor the fraction
31704 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31708 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31711 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31712 fractions with the given denominator.
31715 \begin_layout Enumerate
31716 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31728 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31733 regular expression and adding for it an emphasized or bold face, finds
31734 all emphasized and bold face text, respectively.
31736 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31739 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31740 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31743 \begin_layout Standard
31744 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
31745 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31746 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31749 , and referring back to them through
31750 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31754 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31758 For example, try searching for the regexp
31759 \begin_inset Newline newline
31762 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
31765 \begin_inset Newline newline
31768 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31771 \begin_layout Standard
31772 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31776 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31785 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
31786 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
31787 sub-expressions is absolute.
31789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31793 \begin_inset space ~
31797 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31800 always refers to the first occurrence of
31801 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31804 in all entered regexps.
31812 \begin_layout Section
31814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31816 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31821 \begin_inset Index idx
31824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31833 \begin_layout Standard
31834 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
31837 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31844 or the toolbar button
31847 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31850 starts the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
31851 beginning of the currently selected text.
31852 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
31853 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
31854 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
31855 scrolled so that it is visible.
31856 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
31857 n, if any could be found.
31858 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
31862 field, double-click directly invokes the replacement.
31863 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
31866 \begin_layout Standard
31867 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
31870 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31874 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
31875 a different one at the top of the dialog.
31876 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
31877 This works if you have marked the different languages appropriately and
31878 have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
31879 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
31882 \begin_layout Subsection
31886 \begin_layout Standard
31887 In LyX's preferences dialog under
31890 \begin_inset space ~
31893 Setting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31896 you can set the following things:
31899 \begin_layout Description
31901 \begin_inset space ~
31904 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
31905 Depending on your platform,
31919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31920 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
31921 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
31936 \begin_layout Description
31938 \begin_inset space ~
31941 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
31942 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
31945 \begin_layout Description
31947 \begin_inset space ~
31950 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
31952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31956 \begin_inset space \space{}
31960 This should normally not be needed.
31963 \begin_layout Description
31965 \begin_inset space ~
31969 \begin_inset space ~
31972 words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
31974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31984 \begin_layout Description
31986 \begin_inset space ~
31989 continuously Check the spelling of your document as you type it.
31990 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
31991 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
31992 appear in the context menu.
31993 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
31997 \begin_layout Description
31999 \begin_inset space ~
32003 \begin_inset space ~
32007 \begin_inset space ~
32010 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document contents is checked
32014 \begin_layout Section
32016 \begin_inset Index idx
32019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32028 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32035 \begin_layout Standard
32036 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32037 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32047 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32049 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32058 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32059 Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which
32060 are available for many languages.
32063 \begin_layout Standard
32064 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32068 \begin_layout Subsection
32069 Setting up the thesaurus
32072 \begin_layout Standard
32080 OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32085 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32090 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32096 en_EN for English).
32097 For instance, the English files are named:
32100 \begin_layout Itemize
32104 \begin_layout Itemize
32108 \begin_layout Standard
32109 If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed, these
32110 files should be already on your system.
32111 If not, you can get dictionaries either from
32112 \begin_inset Flex URL
32115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32117 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/dictionaries/trunk/thes
32123 \begin_inset Flex URL
32126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32128 http://extensions.services.openoffice.org/en/search/node/thesaurus
32137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32138 Note that, as of OpenOffice
32139 \begin_inset space ~
32143 \begin_inset Flex URL
32146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32148 http://extensions.services.openoffice.org
32153 are usually packed in extension archives (
32157 ) that contain other files such as spellchecker dictionaries besides the
32159 These archives are simple zip files, so you can unpack them as you would
32160 unpack a zip archive.
32173 files of all languages you want to use into one directory (do not use subfolder
32174 s), and specify the path to this directory in
32176 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32177 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32181 Now the thesaurus should be ready to use.
32184 \begin_layout Subsection
32185 Using the thesaurus
32188 \begin_layout Standard
32189 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32191 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32194 or the toolbar button
32197 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32200 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32202 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32204 The proposals are grouped into categories.
32205 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32206 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32215 ), related terms (such as
32218 \begin_inset space ~
32227 ), compounds (such as
32230 \begin_inset space ~
32239 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32248 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32251 \begin_layout Standard
32252 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32253 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32257 \begin_layout Standard
32258 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32259 the dictionary, such as the above
32263 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32268 \begin_inset space \space{}
32271 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32272 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32273 For example looking up the word form
32274 \change_deleted 2090807402 1338765333
32285 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32291 \change_inserted 2090807402 1338765282
32292 The thesuarus is able to resolve inflected forms (so if you enter
32296 , it will resolve it to the form
32300 which is in the dictionary).
32301 However, this may not always work.
32302 So if you do not get any results for inflected forms, try the lemma form.
32305 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant parts of such word (e.
32306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32310 \begin_inset space \space{}
32321 s), then you get proposals without adjusting the query in the dialog, and
32322 also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted
32323 part will be replaced, thus the ending remains).
32326 \begin_layout Section
32328 \begin_inset Index idx
32331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32338 \begin_inset Index idx
32341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32342 Document ! Change Tracking
32348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32350 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32357 \begin_layout Standard
32358 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32359 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32360 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32361 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32363 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32365 \begin_inset space ~
32368 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32370 \begin_inset space ~
32378 \begin_layout Standard
32379 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32393 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32394 You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under
32397 \begin_inset space ~
32401 \begin_inset space ~
32411 \begin_inset Index idx
32414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32415 Color ! Change tracking
32420 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32421 the cursor is in changed text.
32422 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32425 arg "changes-merge"
32431 \begin_layout Standard
32432 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32433 \begin_inset Index idx
32436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32445 \begin_layout Standard
32446 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32452 \begin_layout Standard
32453 \begin_inset Graphics
32454 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32462 \begin_layout Standard
32463 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32469 \begin_layout Standard
32470 The review toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
32474 \begin_layout Standard
32475 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32481 \begin_layout Standard
32482 \begin_inset Tabular
32483 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32484 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32485 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32496 arg "changes-track"
32504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32510 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32512 \begin_inset space ~
32515 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32517 \begin_inset space ~
32526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32535 arg "changes-output"
32543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32549 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32551 \begin_inset space ~
32554 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32556 \begin_inset space ~
32560 \begin_inset space ~
32564 \begin_inset space ~
32573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32594 Jumps to the next change
32600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32609 arg "change-accept"
32617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32623 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32625 \begin_inset space ~
32628 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32630 \begin_inset space ~
32639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32648 arg "change-reject"
32656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32662 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32664 \begin_inset space ~
32667 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32669 \begin_inset space ~
32678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32687 arg "changes-merge"
32695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32701 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32703 \begin_inset space ~
32706 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32708 \begin_inset space ~
32717 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32726 arg "all-changes-accept"
32734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32740 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32742 \begin_inset space ~
32745 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32747 \begin_inset space ~
32751 \begin_inset space ~
32760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32769 arg "all-changes-reject"
32777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32783 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32785 \begin_inset space ~
32788 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32790 \begin_inset space ~
32794 \begin_inset space ~
32803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32826 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32827 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32829 \begin_inset space ~
32838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32861 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32863 \begin_inset space ~
32879 \begin_layout Standard
32880 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32886 \begin_layout Standard
32887 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
32888 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
32889 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
32890 the next change after the current cursor position.
32891 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
32892 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
32893 step to the next change.
32894 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
32897 \begin_layout Standard
32898 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
32899 to describe a change.
32902 \begin_layout Standard
32903 To show the made changes in the output you need the LaTeX package
32908 \begin_inset Index idx
32911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32912 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
32918 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
32919 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32925 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
32928 \begin_layout Section
32929 Comparison of Documents
32930 \begin_inset Index idx
32933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32934 Comparison of documents
32942 \begin_layout Standard
32943 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
32945 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32949 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
32951 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
32952 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
32956 \begin_inset space ~
32960 \begin_inset space ~
32964 \begin_inset space ~
32973 \begin_inset space ~
32977 \begin_inset space ~
32981 \begin_inset space ~
32985 \begin_inset space ~
32989 \begin_inset space ~
32993 \begin_inset space ~
32998 enables the change tracking option
33001 \begin_inset space ~
33005 \begin_inset space ~
33009 \begin_inset space ~
33014 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33017 \begin_layout Section
33018 International Support
33019 \begin_inset Index idx
33022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33023 International support
33031 \begin_layout Standard
33032 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33033 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33034 up LyX to use them:
33035 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33037 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33044 \begin_layout Standard
33045 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33046 \begin_inset space ~
33050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33052 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33059 \begin_layout Subsection
33061 \begin_inset Index idx
33064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 \begin_inset Index idx
33074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33075 Document ! Settings
33081 \begin_inset Index idx
33084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33085 Document ! Language
33093 \begin_layout Standard
33096 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33097 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33100 dialog lets you set
33102 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33112 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33116 \begin_inset space ~
33121 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33122 For details about the different encoding options see section
33123 \begin_inset space ~
33127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33129 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33136 \begin_layout Subsection
33137 Keyboard mapping configuration
33138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33140 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33147 \begin_layout Standard
33148 If you have for example a U.
33149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33152 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33153 can use an alternate keymap.
33154 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33155 use an Italian keymap.
33158 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33159 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33160 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33163 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33164 \begin_inset space ~
33168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33170 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33175 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33176 which one you want to use.
33179 \begin_layout Standard
33180 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33181 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33182 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33186 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33187 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33188 one to support the characters you want.
33189 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33196 \begin_layout Chapter
33199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33201 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33208 \begin_layout Standard
33209 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33210 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33211 topic inside the user's guide.
33214 \begin_layout Section
33216 \begin_inset Index idx
33219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33228 \begin_layout Standard
33233 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33236 \begin_layout Subsection
33240 \begin_layout Standard
33241 Creates a new document.
33244 \begin_layout Subsection
33248 \begin_layout Standard
33249 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33250 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33251 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33254 \begin_layout Subsection
33258 \begin_layout Standard
33262 \begin_layout Subsection
33266 \begin_layout Standard
33267 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33268 Click there on a file to open it.
33271 \begin_layout Subsection
33275 \begin_layout Standard
33276 Closes the current document.
33279 \begin_layout Subsection
33283 \begin_layout Standard
33284 Closes all opened documents.
33287 \begin_layout Subsection
33291 \begin_layout Standard
33292 Saves the actual document.
33295 \begin_layout Subsection
33299 \begin_layout Standard
33300 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33303 \begin_layout Subsection
33307 \begin_layout Standard
33308 Saves all opened documents.
33311 \begin_layout Subsection
33315 \begin_layout Standard
33316 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33319 \begin_layout Subsection
33323 \begin_layout Standard
33324 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33325 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33326 It is described in the section
33328 Version Control in LyX
33332 Additional Features
33337 \begin_layout Subsection
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33342 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33343 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33345 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33348 \begin_layout Standard
33349 When using the menu entry
33352 \begin_inset space ~
33357 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33361 \begin_inset space ~
33365 \begin_inset space ~
33370 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33371 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33374 \begin_layout Subsection
33376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33385 \begin_layout Standard
33386 You can export your document to various file formats.
33387 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33388 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33389 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33392 \begin_layout Standard
33393 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33395 \begin_inset space ~
33399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33401 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
33408 \begin_layout Description
33414 \begin_inset space ~
33421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33428 yX format of the special LyX
33429 \begin_inset space ~
33432 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33433 \begin_inset Newline newline
33436 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated into LyX.
33439 \begin_layout Description
33440 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33446 \begin_layout Description
33448 \begin_inset space ~
33451 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33457 \begin_layout Description
33458 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
33459 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33460 files paths or file names in your document.
33461 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33468 \begin_layout Description
33469 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33470 in files paths or file names
33473 \begin_layout Description
33475 \begin_inset space ~
33482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33489 eX) DVI-format using the program
33493 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
33496 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33504 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33512 \begin_layout Description
33514 \begin_inset space ~
33517 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33521 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33526 \begin_layout Description
33527 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
33531 \begin_layout Description
33533 \begin_inset space ~
33537 \begin_inset space ~
33540 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33544 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33552 \begin_layout Description
33559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33567 \begin_inset space ~
33578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33591 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
33596 \begin_layout Description
33603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33611 \begin_inset space ~
33616 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
33617 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
33621 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
33624 \begin_layout Description
33631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33644 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
33645 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
33653 \begin_layout Description
33660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33668 \begin_inset space ~
33679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33692 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
33697 \begin_layout Description
33699 \begin_inset space ~
33703 \begin_inset space ~
33712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33721 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
33722 music notation software
33727 \begin_layout Description
33734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33744 \begin_inset space ~
33748 \begin_inset space ~
33751 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
33752 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
33753 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
33756 \begin_layout Description
33763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33776 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
33777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33792 represent the version number)
33795 \begin_layout Description
33802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33811 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
33814 \begin_layout Description
33815 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
33820 \begin_layout Description
33821 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
33823 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
33826 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
33830 \begin_layout Description
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33839 PDF-format using the program
33843 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
33846 \begin_layout Description
33850 \begin_inset space ~
33857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33866 PDF-format using the program
33870 , produces PDF-files directly
33873 \begin_layout Description
33877 \begin_inset space ~
33882 PDF-format using the program
33886 , produces PDF-files directly
33889 \begin_layout Description
33893 \begin_inset space ~
33898 PDF-format using the program
33902 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
33905 \begin_layout Description
33909 \begin_inset space ~
33916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33925 PDF-format using the program
33929 , produces PDF-files directly
33932 \begin_layout Description
33936 \begin_inset space ~
33944 \begin_layout Description
33948 \begin_inset space ~
33952 \begin_inset space ~
33957 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
33958 and then exported as text using the program
33963 \begin_layout Description
33968 PostScript format using the program
33973 \begin_layout Description
33974 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
33975 programming language
33988 it is possible to use
33995 \begin_layout Standard
33996 If one of the menu entries
34003 \begin_inset space ~
34012 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34013 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34014 \begin_inset space ~
34018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34020 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34025 \begin_inset Index idx
34028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34029 Reconfiguration of LyX
34037 \begin_layout Subsection
34041 \begin_layout Standard
34042 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34043 format or send it to a printer.
34044 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34045 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34051 For more information have a look at section
34052 \begin_inset space ~
34056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34058 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34065 \begin_layout Subsection
34069 \begin_layout Standard
34070 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34071 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34072 prefix, see section
34073 \begin_inset space ~
34077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34079 reference "sec:Paths"
34084 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34093 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34094 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34101 reference "sub:Converters"
34108 \begin_layout Subsection
34109 New and Close Window
34112 \begin_layout Standard
34113 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34116 \begin_layout Subsection
34120 \begin_layout Standard
34121 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34124 \begin_layout Section
34126 \begin_inset Index idx
34129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34138 \begin_layout Subsection
34142 \begin_layout Standard
34143 Described in section
34144 \begin_inset space ~
34148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34150 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34157 \begin_layout Subsection
34158 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34161 \begin_layout Standard
34162 Described in section
34163 \begin_inset space ~
34167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34169 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34176 \begin_layout Subsection
34180 \begin_layout Standard
34181 Selects the content of the inset where the cursor is currently in.
34182 If the cursor is outside of an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34185 \begin_layout Subsection
34189 \begin_layout Standard
34190 Selects the whole document.
34193 \begin_layout Subsection
34194 Find & Replace (Quick)
34197 \begin_layout Standard
34198 Described in section
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34205 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34212 \begin_layout Subsection
34213 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34217 Described in section
34218 \begin_inset space ~
34222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34224 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34231 \begin_layout Subsection
34232 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34235 \begin_layout Standard
34236 This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph
34240 \begin_layout Subsection
34244 \begin_layout Standard
34245 Described in section
34246 \begin_inset space ~
34250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34252 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34259 \begin_layout Subsection
34261 \begin_inset Index idx
34264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34265 Paragraph ! Settings
34273 \begin_layout Standard
34274 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34275 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34279 \begin_layout Standard
34280 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34281 have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the
34283 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34289 \begin_inset space ~
34297 \begin_layout Subsection
34298 Table Settings and Math
34301 \begin_layout Standard
34302 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34304 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34305 The properties of tables are described in section
34306 \begin_inset space ~
34310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34312 reference "sec:Tables"
34316 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34317 \begin_inset space ~
34321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34323 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34330 \begin_layout Subsection
34331 Increase / Decrease List Depth
34334 \begin_layout Standard
34335 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34337 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34338 \begin_inset space ~
34342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34344 reference "sec:Nesting"
34349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34351 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34358 \begin_layout Section
34360 \begin_inset Index idx
34363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34372 \begin_layout Standard
34373 At the bottom of the
34377 menu the opened documents are listed.
34380 \begin_layout Subsection
34381 Open/Close all Insets
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34385 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34388 \begin_layout Subsection
34389 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34392 \begin_layout Standard
34393 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 Math macros are described in the
34404 \begin_layout Subsection
34408 \begin_layout Standard
34409 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34411 \begin_inset space ~
34415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34417 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34424 \begin_layout Subsection
34428 \begin_layout Standard
34429 Opens a window showing console messages.
34430 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
34431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34434 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34435 while LaTeX is processing the document.
34438 \begin_layout Subsection
34442 \begin_layout Standard
34443 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
34444 default output format either in the preferences (see sec.
34445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34451 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34455 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34462 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34466 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
34467 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
34468 \begin_inset space ~
34472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34474 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34479 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
34480 The default output format is
34483 \begin_inset space ~
34491 \begin_layout Subsection
34492 View (Other Formats)
34495 \begin_layout Standard
34496 With this submenu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
34497 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
34498 actual document with an external program.
34499 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
34500 the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured.
34501 All possible formats are listed in section
34502 \begin_inset space ~
34506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34508 reference "sub:Export"
34513 You should at least see the menu entry
34518 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
34519 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34520 \begin_inset space ~
34524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34526 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34531 \begin_inset Index idx
34534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34535 Reconfiguration of LyX
34543 \begin_layout Standard
34544 Invoking a menu will start a viewer program.
34545 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
34546 \begin_inset space ~
34550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34552 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34557 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
34560 \begin_layout Subsection
34564 \begin_layout Standard
34565 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
34566 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
34569 \begin_layout Subsection
34570 Update (Other Formats)
34573 \begin_layout Standard
34574 With this submenu you can update the view of alternative output formats
34575 of your document without opening a new viewer window.
34578 \begin_layout Subsection
34579 View Master Document
34582 \begin_layout Standard
34583 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
34585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34599 \begin_inset space ~
34604 manual for more information on this topic).
34605 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
34606 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
34611 generates the output of the whole book, while
34615 will just output the chapter alone.
34618 \begin_layout Standard
34619 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
34620 in the preferences (see sec.
34621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34627 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34631 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34638 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34645 \begin_layout Subsection
34646 Update Master Document
34649 \begin_layout Standard
34650 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
34652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34666 \begin_inset space ~
34671 manual for more information on this topic).
34672 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
34673 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
34676 \begin_layout Standard
34677 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
34678 in the preferences (see sec.
34679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34685 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34689 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34696 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34703 \begin_layout Subsection
34707 \begin_layout Standard
34708 This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally.
34709 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
34710 to view the same document, but at different positions.
34711 You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3
34712 or more documents at the same time.
34713 To return to an unsplit view, use the menu
34720 \begin_layout Subsection
34724 \begin_layout Standard
34725 Closes a split view.
34728 \begin_layout Subsection
34732 \begin_layout Standard
34733 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
34734 so that you will see nothing but your text.
34735 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
34736 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
34737 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
34740 \begin_layout Subsection
34742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34744 name "sub:Toolbars"
34749 \begin_inset Index idx
34752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34761 \begin_layout Standard
34762 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34763 All toolbars and the
34766 \begin_inset space ~
34771 can be turned on and off.
34776 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34788 \begin_inset space ~
34796 \begin_inset space ~
34805 toolbars can be additionally set to the state
34809 that is denoted in the menu with the suffix
34816 \begin_layout Standard
34821 state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the
34825 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
34826 or when a certain feature is enabled.
34827 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
34828 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
34829 is inside a formula or table, respectively.
34832 \begin_layout Standard
34833 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
34834 \begin_inset space ~
34838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34840 reference "sec:Toolbars"
34847 \begin_layout Section
34849 \begin_inset Index idx
34852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34861 \begin_layout Subsection
34865 \begin_layout Standard
34866 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
34867 \begin_inset space ~
34871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34873 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34884 \begin_layout Subsection
34886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34888 name "sub:Special-Character"
34895 \begin_layout Standard
34896 Here you can insert the following characters:
34899 \begin_layout Description
34900 Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system.
34901 Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available
34902 characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
34903 \begin_inset Newline newline
34907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34915 Not all characters will be visible in the
34919 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
34921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34927 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
34931 ) can display every character.
34939 \begin_layout Description
34940 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
34944 \begin_layout Description
34946 \begin_inset space ~
34950 \begin_inset space ~
34953 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section
34954 \begin_inset space ~
34958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34960 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
34967 \begin_layout Description
34969 \begin_inset space ~
34972 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the
34975 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34985 \begin_layout Description
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34991 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809482
34993 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809484
34997 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809487
34999 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35003 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809513
35004 in the quotation marks style selected in the
35006 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35018 \begin_layout Description
35020 \begin_inset space ~
35023 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35027 \begin_layout Description
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35032 Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35036 \begin_layout Description
35038 \begin_inset space ~
35041 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35045 \begin_layout Description
35047 \begin_inset space ~
35051 \begin_inset Index idx
35054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35061 \begin_inset Index idx
35064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35065 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35071 \change_deleted -712698321 1345808954
35072 Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset
35073 \change_inserted -712698321 1345808969
35074 Inserts a box where
35075 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809001
35080 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809047
35081 commands to create IPA phonetic
35084 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809189
35085 from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which
35086 provides a large set of these symbols
35090 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809068
35092 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809068
35096 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809224
35097 with traditional LaTeX
35099 you must have the LaTeX-package
35104 \begin_inset Index idx
35107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35108 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35114 \begin_inset Newline newline
35118 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809282
35120 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809283
35123 ore information about this feature
35124 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809286
35125 we refer you to the documentation of
35128 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35136 and this Wiki-page:
35137 \begin_inset Newline newline
35141 \begin_inset Flex URL
35144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35146 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX
35152 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809397
35153 can be found in the Linguistics manual (
35155 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35156 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35164 \begin_layout Subsection
35168 \begin_layout Standard
35169 Here you can insert the following format constructs:
35172 \begin_layout Description
35173 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35174 \begin_inset script superscript
35176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35185 \begin_layout Description
35186 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35187 \begin_inset script subscript
35189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35198 \begin_layout Description
35200 \begin_inset space ~
35203 Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35210 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35217 \begin_layout Description
35219 \begin_inset space ~
35222 Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section
35223 \begin_inset space ~
35227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35229 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35236 \begin_layout Description
35238 \begin_inset space ~
35241 Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section
35242 \begin_inset space ~
35246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35248 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35255 \begin_layout Description
35257 \begin_inset space ~
35260 Space Inserts horizontal space, see section
35261 \begin_inset space ~
35265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35267 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35274 \begin_layout Description
35276 \begin_inset space ~
35279 Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section
35280 \begin_inset space ~
35284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35286 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35293 \begin_layout Description
35295 \begin_inset space ~
35298 Space Inserts vertical space, see section
35299 \begin_inset space ~
35303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35305 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35312 \begin_layout Description
35313 Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35320 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35327 \begin_layout Description
35329 \begin_inset space ~
35332 Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section
35333 \begin_inset space ~
35337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35339 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35346 \begin_layout Description
35348 \begin_inset space ~
35351 Break Inserts a ligature break, see section
35352 \begin_inset space ~
35356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35358 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35365 \begin_layout Description
35367 \begin_inset space ~
35371 \begin_inset space ~
35374 Break Inserts a forced line break, see section
35375 \begin_inset space ~
35379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35381 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35388 \begin_layout Description
35390 \begin_inset space ~
35393 Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken
35394 text line to the page border, see section
35395 \begin_inset space ~
35399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35401 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35408 \begin_layout Description
35410 \begin_inset space ~
35413 Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section
35414 \begin_inset space ~
35418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35420 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35427 \begin_layout Description
35429 \begin_inset space ~
35432 Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken
35433 text page to the page border, described in section
35434 \begin_inset space ~
35438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35440 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35447 \begin_layout Description
35449 \begin_inset space ~
35452 Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section
35453 \begin_inset space ~
35457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35459 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35466 \begin_layout Description
35468 \begin_inset space ~
35472 \begin_inset space ~
35475 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section
35476 \begin_inset space ~
35480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35482 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35489 \begin_layout Subsection
35493 \begin_layout Standard
35494 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35495 The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described
35497 \begin_inset space ~
35501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35503 reference "sec:toc"
35508 The index list is described in section
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35515 reference "sec:Index"
35519 , the nomenclature in section
35520 \begin_inset space ~
35524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35526 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35530 and the BibTeX bibliography in section
35531 \begin_inset space ~
35535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35537 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
35544 \begin_layout Subsection
35548 \begin_layout Standard
35549 To insert floats, described in section
35550 \begin_inset space ~
35554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35556 reference "sec:Floats"
35563 \begin_layout Subsection
35567 \begin_layout Standard
35568 To insert notes, described in section
35569 \begin_inset space ~
35573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35575 reference "sec:Notes"
35582 \begin_layout Subsection
35586 \begin_layout Standard
35587 Inserts branch insets as described in section
35588 \begin_inset space ~
35592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35594 reference "sec:Branches"
35601 \begin_layout Subsection
35605 \begin_layout Standard
35606 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35607 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35609 An example is the document class
35610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35617 with three custom insets.
35620 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35626 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35629 \begin_layout Subsection
35631 \begin_inset Index idx
35634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35643 \begin_layout Standard
35644 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35646 How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter
35653 \begin_inset space ~
35661 \begin_layout Subsection
35663 \begin_inset Index idx
35666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35675 \begin_layout Standard
35676 Inserts a minipage box that is described section
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35683 reference "sec:Minipages"
35688 All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter
35695 \begin_inset space ~
35703 \begin_layout Subsection
35707 \begin_layout Standard
35708 Inserts a citation as described in section
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35715 reference "sec:Bibliography"
35722 \begin_layout Subsection
35726 \begin_layout Standard
35727 Inserts a cross-reference as described in section
35728 \begin_inset space ~
35732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35734 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35741 \begin_layout Subsection
35745 \begin_layout Standard
35746 Inserts a label as described in section
35747 \begin_inset space ~
35751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35760 \begin_layout Subsection
35762 \begin_inset Index idx
35765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35772 \begin_inset Index idx
35775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35776 Longtables ! Caption
35784 \begin_layout Standard
35785 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
35786 Floats are described in section
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35793 reference "sec:Floats"
35797 , captions in longtables are described in the section
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35812 \begin_layout Subsection
35816 \begin_layout Standard
35817 Inserts an index entry as described in section
35818 \begin_inset space ~
35822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35824 reference "sec:Index"
35831 \begin_layout Subsection
35835 \begin_layout Standard
35836 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35843 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35850 \begin_layout Subsection
35854 \begin_layout Standard
35856 Tables are described in section
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35863 reference "sec:Tables"
35870 \begin_layout Subsection
35874 \begin_layout Standard
35876 Graphics are described in section
35877 \begin_inset space ~
35881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35883 reference "sec:Graphics"
35890 \begin_layout Subsection
35894 \begin_layout Standard
35895 Inserts a URL as described in section
35896 \begin_inset space ~
35900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35902 reference "sub:URLs"
35909 \begin_layout Subsection
35913 \begin_layout Standard
35914 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35921 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
35928 \begin_layout Subsection
35932 \begin_layout Standard
35933 Inserts a footnote, see section
35934 \begin_inset space ~
35938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35940 reference "sec:Footnotes"
35947 \begin_layout Subsection
35951 \begin_layout Standard
35952 Inserts a marginal note, see section
35953 \begin_inset space ~
35957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35959 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
35966 \begin_layout Subsection
35970 \begin_layout Standard
35971 Inserts a short title, see section
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35978 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
35985 \begin_layout Subsection
35989 \begin_layout Standard
35990 Inserts a TeX Code box, see section
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35997 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36004 \begin_layout Subsection
36006 \begin_inset Index idx
36009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36018 \begin_layout Standard
36019 Inserts a program listings box.
36020 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36022 Program Code Listings
36027 \begin_inset space ~
36035 \begin_layout Subsection
36039 \begin_layout Standard
36040 Inserts the actual date.
36041 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36043 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36051 \begin_inset space ~
36059 \begin_layout Subsection
36063 \begin_layout Standard
36064 Inserts a preview inset, see section
36065 \begin_inset space ~
36069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36071 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36078 \begin_layout Section
36080 \begin_inset Index idx
36083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36092 \begin_layout Standard
36093 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36094 \begin_inset space ~
36097 of the current document.
36098 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36101 \begin_layout Subsection
36105 \begin_layout Standard
36106 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36107 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36113 \begin_inset space \space{}
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36121 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36122 \begin_inset space ~
36125 2.5 and use the submenu
36128 \begin_inset space ~
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36139 \begin_inset space ~
36145 \begin_inset space ~
36149 \begin_inset space ~
36155 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36159 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36165 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36171 \begin_layout Standard
36172 You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36173 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36176 \begin_layout Subsection
36177 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36181 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current
36185 \begin_layout Subsection
36189 \begin_layout Standard
36190 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36191 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36192 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36196 \begin_inset space ~
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36208 \begin_layout Subsection
36212 \begin_layout Standard
36213 This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part
36214 in the output, see section
36217 \begin_inset space ~
36225 \begin_inset space ~
36230 manual for a detailed description.
36233 \begin_layout Section
36235 \begin_inset Index idx
36238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36247 \begin_layout Subsection
36251 \begin_layout Standard
36252 Change Tracking is described in section
36253 \begin_inset space ~
36257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36259 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36266 \begin_layout Subsection
36271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36281 \begin_layout Standard
36282 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36284 It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program.
36287 \begin_layout Standard
36288 Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background.
36293 will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36296 \begin_layout Subsection
36300 \begin_layout Standard
36301 Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section
36302 \begin_inset space ~
36306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36308 reference "sec:Navigating"
36313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36315 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
36322 \begin_layout Subsection
36323 Start Appendix Here
36326 \begin_layout Standard
36327 This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor
36328 position as described in section
36329 \begin_inset space ~
36333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36335 reference "sec:Appendices"
36342 \begin_layout Subsection
36346 \begin_layout Standard
36347 Un/compresses the current document.
36350 \begin_layout Subsection
36354 \begin_layout Standard
36355 The document settings are described in appendix
36356 \begin_inset space ~
36360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36362 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
36369 \begin_layout Section
36371 \begin_inset Index idx
36374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36383 \begin_layout Subsection
36387 \begin_layout Standard
36388 Spell checking is explained in section
36389 \begin_inset space ~
36393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36395 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
36402 \begin_layout Subsection
36406 \begin_layout Standard
36407 The thesaurus is described in section
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36414 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
36421 \begin_layout Subsection
36423 \begin_inset Index idx
36426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36433 \begin_inset Index idx
36436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36445 \begin_layout Standard
36446 Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted
36450 \begin_layout Subsection
36452 \begin_inset Index idx
36455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36464 \begin_layout Standard
36465 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
36469 \begin_layout Subsection
36471 \begin_inset Index idx
36474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36475 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
36479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36486 Reconfiguration of LyX
36490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36503 \begin_inset Index idx
36506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36507 Reconfiguration of LyX
36515 \begin_layout Standard
36516 This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages
36517 and programs it needs; see also section
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36524 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36531 \begin_layout Subsection
36535 \begin_layout Standard
36536 The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix
36537 \begin_inset space ~
36541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36543 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
36550 \begin_layout Section
36552 \begin_inset Index idx
36555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36564 \begin_layout Standard
36565 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
36567 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
36571 \begin_layout Standard
36575 \begin_inset space ~
36580 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
36581 found by LyX (see also section
36582 \begin_inset space ~
36586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36588 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
36595 \begin_layout Section
36597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36599 name "sec:Toolbars"
36606 \begin_layout Standard
36607 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36614 reference "sub:Toolbars"
36621 \begin_layout Standard
36622 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
36623 This is described in the
36625 Additional Features
36630 \begin_layout Subsection
36632 \begin_inset Index idx
36635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36644 \begin_layout Standard
36645 \begin_inset Graphics
36646 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
36654 \begin_layout Standard
36655 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36661 \begin_layout Standard
36662 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
36667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36679 \begin_inset Note Note
36682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36683 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
36688 manual for more information.
36696 \begin_layout Standard
36697 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36703 \begin_layout Standard
36704 \begin_inset Tabular
36705 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
36706 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36707 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
36708 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
36710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36714 \begin_inset Graphics
36715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
36725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36729 pull-down box for the environments
36742 \begin_layout Standard
36743 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
36749 \begin_layout Standard
36751 \begin_inset Tabular
36752 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="2">
36753 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36754 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
36755 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
36756 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36779 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36786 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36809 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36839 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36846 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36855 arg "dialog-show print"
36863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36869 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36885 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36899 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36929 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36959 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36989 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36996 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37019 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37049 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37065 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37079 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37094 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37103 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37117 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37118 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37146 Emphasize text, function of the
37148 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37150 \begin_inset space ~
37161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37182 Set text to noun style, function of the
37184 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37186 \begin_inset space ~
37197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37206 arg "textstyle-apply"
37214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37218 Formats text using the current settings in the
37220 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37222 \begin_inset space ~
37233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37256 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37257 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37259 \begin_inset space ~
37268 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37277 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
37285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37291 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37305 arg "tabular-insert"
37313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37319 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37335 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
37343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37347 Toggle outline window on/off,
37349 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37365 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
37373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37377 Toggle math toolbar on/off
37383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37392 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
37400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37404 Toggle table toolbar on/off
37417 \begin_layout Subsection
37419 \begin_inset Index idx
37422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37431 \begin_layout Standard
37432 \begin_inset Graphics
37433 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
37441 \begin_layout Standard
37442 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37448 \begin_layout Standard
37449 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37453 \begin_layout Standard
37454 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37460 \begin_layout Standard
37461 \begin_inset Tabular
37462 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
37463 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37464 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
37465 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
37466 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37502 arg "layout Enumerate"
37510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37529 arg "layout Itemize"
37537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37547 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37583 arg "layout Description"
37591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37610 arg "depth-increment"
37618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37624 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37630 \begin_inset space ~
37639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37648 arg "depth-decrement"
37656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37662 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37677 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37686 arg "float-insert figure"
37694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37700 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37701 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37717 arg "float-insert table"
37725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37731 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37732 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37762 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37778 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
37786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37792 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37808 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
37816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37822 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37829 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37852 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37854 \begin_inset space ~
37863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37872 arg "nomencl-insert"
37880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37886 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37888 \begin_inset space ~
37897 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37906 arg "footnote-insert"
37914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37920 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37936 arg "marginalnote-insert"
37944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37950 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37984 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37985 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37987 \begin_inset space ~
37996 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38005 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38019 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38049 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38079 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38114 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38128 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38129 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38145 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38159 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38160 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38162 \begin_inset space ~
38171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38180 arg "dialog-show character"
38188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38194 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38196 \begin_inset space ~
38205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38214 arg "layout-paragraph"
38222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38228 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38230 \begin_inset space ~
38239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38248 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38262 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38276 \begin_layout Subsection
38277 View / Update Toolbar
38278 \begin_inset Index idx
38281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38282 Toolbar ! View / Update
38290 \begin_layout Standard
38291 \begin_inset Graphics
38292 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
38299 \begin_layout Standard
38300 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38306 \begin_layout Standard
38307 The view / update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the
38311 \begin_layout Standard
38312 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38318 \begin_layout Standard
38319 \begin_inset Tabular
38320 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
38321 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38322 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
38323 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
38324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38347 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38363 arg "buffer-update"
38371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38377 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38393 arg "master-buffer-view"
38401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38407 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38414 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38423 arg "master-buffer-update"
38431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38437 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38439 \begin_inset space ~
38448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38457 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
38465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38471 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38472 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38473 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38474 Synchronize with Output
38480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38485 \begin_inset Graphics
38486 filename ../images/view-others.png
38488 groupId toolbarbuttons
38499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38505 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38506 View (Other Formats)
38512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38517 \begin_inset Graphics
38518 filename ../images/update-others.png
38520 groupId toolbarbuttons
38529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38535 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38536 Update (Other Formats)
38549 \begin_layout Standard
38550 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
38554 \begin_layout Subsection
38558 \begin_layout Standard
38559 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
38560 \begin_inset space ~
38564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38566 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38570 , the table toolbar
38571 \begin_inset Index idx
38574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38583 \begin_inset space ~
38588 manual, the math macro toolbar
38589 \begin_inset Index idx
38592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38605 \begin_layout Chapter
38606 The Document Settings
38607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38609 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38614 \begin_inset Index idx
38617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38618 Document ! Settings
38626 \begin_layout Standard
38627 The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the
38628 whole document and is called with the menu
38630 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38634 You can save your document settings as default with the
38636 Save as Document Defaults
38638 button in the dialog.
38639 This will create a template named
38643 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
38647 \begin_layout Standard
38652 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
38653 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
38656 \begin_layout Standard
38657 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
38660 \begin_layout Section
38664 \begin_layout Standard
38665 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
38667 Document classes are described in section
38668 \begin_inset space ~
38672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38674 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
38682 \begin_layout Standard
38686 \begin_inset space ~
38691 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
38695 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as layout for a document class.
38696 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
38698 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
38707 \begin_layout Standard
38708 Some classes use special class options by default.
38709 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
38713 and you can decide to use them or not.
38714 If you do not exactly know what the default class options are for, it is
38715 recommended to leave them untouched.
38720 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
38725 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
38726 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
38731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38732 When you want to use one of the following drivers
38733 \begin_inset Newline newline
38738 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
38741 \begin_inset Newline newline
38744 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
38750 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38752 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
38764 \begin_layout Standard
38765 Specifying a master document is necessary if the current document is a child
38767 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
38768 document is opened without its master.
38769 This way child documents are always compilable.
38770 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38785 \begin_layout Standard
38786 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
38796 \begin_inset Index idx
38799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38800 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
38806 \begin_inset Index idx
38809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38810 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
38815 for cross-references, see sec.
38816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38822 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38829 \begin_layout Section
38833 \begin_layout Standard
38834 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
38835 Please refer to the section
38838 \begin_inset space ~
38846 \begin_inset space ~
38851 manual for details.
38854 \begin_layout Section
38858 \begin_layout Standard
38859 Modules are explained in section
38860 \begin_inset space ~
38864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38866 reference "sub:Modules"
38873 \begin_layout Section
38877 \begin_layout Standard
38879 \begin_inset space ~
38883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38885 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
38892 \begin_layout Section
38896 \begin_layout Standard
38897 The document font settings are described in section
38898 \begin_inset space ~
38902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38904 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
38911 \begin_layout Section
38915 \begin_layout Standard
38916 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical
38918 The line spacing and the number of text columns can also be specified here.
38921 \begin_layout Standard
38922 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen.
38923 That would be impractical, often unreadable and is not part of the WYSIWYM
38925 However, it will be as you specified it in the output.
38928 \begin_layout Section
38932 \begin_layout Standard
38933 A description of this menu is given in section
38934 \begin_inset space ~
38938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38940 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
38945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38947 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
38954 \begin_layout Section
38958 \begin_layout Standard
38959 Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section
38960 \begin_inset space ~
38964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38966 reference "sub:Margins"
38973 \begin_layout Section
38975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38977 name "sec:Language-encodings"
38982 \begin_inset Index idx
38985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38986 Language ! Encoding
38994 \begin_layout Standard
38995 The document language and quote styles are set here.
38996 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
38997 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
38998 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
38999 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
39000 known for a particular character).
39004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39005 The known commands are defined in a text file (
39010 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
39015 manual for details.
39023 \begin_layout Standard
39024 If you use the option
39028 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39029 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39030 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
39031 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39032 exactly one encoding.
39033 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39036 \begin_layout Standard
39037 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39038 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39039 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
39040 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39041 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
39042 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39047 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
39048 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
39049 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39050 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
39051 engines to standard LaTeX.
39052 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39053 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39075 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 \begin_inset space ~
39100 \begin_inset space ~
39104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39106 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
39111 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
39115 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
39118 \begin_layout Standard
39122 \begin_inset space ~
39127 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
39129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39137 The possible settings are:
39140 \begin_layout Description
39141 Default uses the language package that is selected in
39143 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39144 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39148 \begin_inset space ~
39152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39154 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
39161 \begin_layout Description
39162 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
39163 format you will use.
39164 In many cases this will be
39169 \begin_inset Index idx
39172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39173 LaTeX-packages ! babel
39179 If the newer package
39184 \begin_inset Index idx
39187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39188 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
39193 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
39194 this package will be used instead of
39201 \begin_layout Description
39203 \begin_inset space ~
39214 would be more appropriate.
39217 \begin_layout Description
39218 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
39219 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
39223 (for German texts), type in
39226 \begin_inset Newline newline
39231 usepackage{ngerman}
39234 \begin_layout Description
39235 None will not use a language package.
39236 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
39239 \begin_layout Standard
39240 Here is a list with the important encodings:
39243 \begin_layout Description
39245 \begin_inset space ~
39249 \begin_inset space ~
39253 \begin_inset space ~
39260 , but the LaTeX-package
39265 \begin_inset Index idx
39268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39269 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
39275 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
39276 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
39277 languages in TeX code.
39280 \begin_layout Description
39281 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
39282 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
39283 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
39286 \begin_layout Description
39288 \begin_inset space ~
39292 \begin_inset space ~
39295 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
39298 \begin_layout Description
39300 \begin_inset space ~
39304 \begin_inset space ~
39307 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
39310 \begin_layout Description
39312 \begin_inset space ~
39315 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
39318 \begin_layout Description
39320 \begin_inset space ~
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39327 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
39328 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
39331 \begin_layout Description
39333 \begin_inset space ~
39337 \begin_inset space ~
39340 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
39344 \begin_layout Description
39346 \begin_inset space ~
39350 \begin_inset space ~
39353 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
39354 ISO-8859-13 encoding
39357 \begin_layout Description
39359 \begin_inset space ~
39363 \begin_inset space ~
39367 \begin_inset space ~
39370 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
39371 \begin_inset space ~
39377 \begin_layout Description
39379 \begin_inset space ~
39383 \begin_inset space ~
39387 \begin_inset space ~
39390 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
39391 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
39394 \begin_layout Description
39396 \begin_inset space ~
39400 \begin_inset space ~
39403 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
39404 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
39405 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
39406 \begin_inset space ~
39410 \begin_inset space ~
39416 \begin_layout Description
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39425 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
39426 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
39427 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
39428 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
39429 \begin_inset space ~
39433 \begin_inset space ~
39439 \begin_layout Description
39441 \begin_inset space ~
39445 \begin_inset space ~
39448 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
39451 \begin_layout Description
39453 \begin_inset space ~
39457 \begin_inset space ~
39460 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
39463 \begin_layout Description
39465 \begin_inset space ~
39469 \begin_inset space ~
39472 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
39475 \begin_layout Description
39477 \begin_inset space ~
39480 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
39483 \begin_layout Description
39485 \begin_inset space ~
39488 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
39491 \begin_layout Description
39493 \begin_inset space ~
39497 \begin_inset space ~
39500 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
39503 \begin_layout Description
39505 \begin_inset space ~
39509 \begin_inset space ~
39515 \begin_layout Description
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39521 \begin_inset space ~
39524 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
39527 \begin_layout Description
39529 \begin_inset space ~
39533 \begin_inset space ~
39539 \begin_layout Description
39541 \begin_inset space ~
39545 \begin_inset space ~
39548 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39553 \begin_inset Index idx
39556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39557 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
39562 , when using this, set the document language to
39567 \begin_layout Description
39569 \begin_inset space ~
39573 \begin_inset space ~
39576 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39580 , when using this, set the document language to
39583 \begin_inset space ~
39589 \begin_layout Description
39591 \begin_inset space ~
39595 \begin_inset space ~
39598 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39603 \begin_inset Index idx
39606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39607 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
39612 , when using this, set the document language to
39617 \begin_layout Description
39619 \begin_inset space ~
39623 \begin_inset space ~
39626 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39630 , when using this, set the document language to
39635 \begin_layout Description
39637 \begin_inset space ~
39641 \begin_inset space ~
39644 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39648 , when using this, set the document language to
39653 \begin_layout Description
39655 \begin_inset space ~
39658 (EUC-KR) for Korean
39661 \begin_layout Description
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39667 \begin_inset space ~
39671 \begin_inset space ~
39674 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
39677 \begin_layout Description
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39683 \begin_inset space ~
39687 \begin_inset space ~
39690 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
39691 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
39692 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
39695 \begin_layout Description
39697 \begin_inset space ~
39701 \begin_inset space ~
39707 \begin_layout Description
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39713 \begin_inset space ~
39716 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
39717 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
39720 \begin_layout Description
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39729 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
39734 \begin_inset Index idx
39737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39738 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
39743 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
39746 \begin_layout Description
39748 \begin_inset space ~
39752 \begin_inset space ~
39755 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
39763 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
39768 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
39770 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
39773 \begin_layout Description
39775 \begin_inset space ~
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39782 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
39787 \begin_inset Index idx
39790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39791 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
39796 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
39799 \begin_layout Description
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39804 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
39809 \begin_inset Index idx
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39813 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
39819 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
39823 \begin_layout Description
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39829 \begin_inset space ~
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39836 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
39837 \begin_inset space ~
39843 \begin_layout Description
39845 \begin_inset space ~
39849 \begin_inset space ~
39853 \begin_inset space ~
39856 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
39857 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
39858 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
39862 \begin_layout Description
39864 \begin_inset space ~
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39872 \begin_inset space ~
39875 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
39876 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
39879 \begin_layout Standard
39880 Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the
39883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39889 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
39893 for more information on the language package.
39896 \begin_layout Section
39898 \begin_inset Index idx
39901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39908 \begin_inset Index idx
39911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and
39923 \begin_inset space ~
39926 out notes (default: light grey).
39931 sets the color back to the default.
39934 \begin_layout Standard
39935 You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white)
39937 \begin_inset space ~
39940 boxes (default: red).
39943 \begin_layout Standard
39944 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39948 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
39950 \begin_inset space ~
39953 out note appears blue in the output.)
39961 \begin_layout Standard
39962 Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39970 in the document settings under
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39978 , you probably also need to change the link font color by using
39981 \begin_inset space ~
39989 \begin_inset space ~
39995 For example the option
39998 \begin_layout Standard
40004 \begin_layout Standard
40005 sets the link text color to black.
40006 For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package
40011 \begin_inset Index idx
40014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40015 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
40021 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40030 \begin_layout Standard
40031 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40037 \begin_layout Standard
40038 You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every
40039 page in your document if you use these commands as TeX
40040 \begin_inset space ~
40043 Code behind a forced page break:
40046 \begin_layout Itemize
40047 For the page color:
40048 \begin_inset Newline newline
40055 pagecolor{color name}
40058 \begin_layout Itemize
40059 For the text color:
40060 \begin_inset Newline newline
40070 \begin_layout Standard
40071 The color name can hereby be one of these:
40104 \begin_inset Newline newline
40107 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the
40111 \begin_layout Itemize
40112 For the page background color:
40113 \begin_inset Newline newline
40118 page_backgroundcolor
40121 \begin_layout Itemize
40122 For the main text color:
40123 \begin_inset Newline newline
40131 \begin_layout Itemize
40133 \begin_inset space ~
40136 box background color:
40137 \begin_inset Newline newline
40145 \begin_layout Itemize
40147 \begin_inset space ~
40150 out note text color:
40151 \begin_inset Newline newline
40159 \begin_layout Standard
40160 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
40163 \begin_inset space ~
40171 \begin_inset space ~
40179 \begin_layout Section
40183 \begin_layout Standard
40184 Here you can adjust the numbering depth of section headings and the section
40185 depth in the table of contents as described in section
40186 \begin_inset space ~
40190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40192 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
40199 \begin_layout Section
40203 \begin_layout Standard
40204 Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages
40209 \begin_inset Index idx
40212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40213 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
40223 \begin_inset Index idx
40226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40227 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
40233 You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package
40238 \begin_inset Index idx
40241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40242 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
40247 and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being
40249 For a further description see section
40250 \begin_inset space ~
40254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40256 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40263 \begin_layout Section
40267 \begin_layout Standard
40268 Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated
40269 and you can define additional indexes.
40270 Please refer to section
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40277 reference "sec:Index"
40284 \begin_layout Section
40288 \begin_layout Standard
40289 The PDF properties are explained in section
40290 \begin_inset space ~
40294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40296 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40303 \begin_layout Section
40307 \begin_layout Standard
40308 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
40313 \begin_inset Index idx
40316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40317 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
40327 \begin_inset Index idx
40330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40331 LaTeX-packages ! esint
40341 \begin_inset Index idx
40344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40345 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
40355 \begin_inset Index idx
40358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40359 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
40364 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
40367 \begin_layout Description
40368 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
40369 ensure that you have enabled
40372 \begin_inset space ~
40380 \begin_layout Description
40381 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
40384 \begin_inset space ~
40396 \begin_layout Description
40397 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
40408 \begin_layout Description
40409 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
40411 Chemical Symbols and Equations
40420 \begin_layout Section
40424 \begin_layout Standard
40425 The float placement options are described in section
40428 \begin_inset space ~
40436 \begin_inset space ~
40444 \begin_layout Section
40448 \begin_layout Standard
40449 The listings settings are explained in chapter
40451 Program Code Listings
40456 \begin_inset space ~
40464 \begin_layout Section
40468 \begin_layout Standard
40469 Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels.
40470 The itemize environment is described in section
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40477 reference "sec:Itemize"
40484 \begin_layout Section
40488 \begin_layout Standard
40489 Branches are described in section
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40496 reference "sec:Branches"
40503 \begin_layout Section
40505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40507 name "sec:Doc-Output"
40514 \begin_layout Standard
40515 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
40518 \begin_layout Description
40520 \begin_inset space ~
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40527 Format: The format that is used when you hit
40528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40547 View Master Document
40548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40555 Update Master Document
40556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40563 menu or the toolbar.
40564 The default is set in
40566 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40567 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40577 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40584 \begin_layout Description
40586 \begin_inset space ~
40590 \begin_inset space ~
40593 Output settings for the menu
40595 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40603 For a detailed description see section
40605 Reverse DVI/PDF search
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40618 \begin_layout Description
40620 \begin_inset space ~
40624 \begin_inset space ~
40627 Options settings for the export format
40635 \begin_inset space ~
40640 will assure that the output follows exactly version
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40644 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40653 settings are described in detail in section
40655 Math Output in XHTML
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40666 The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output.
40669 \begin_layout Section
40674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40684 \begin_layout Standard
40685 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
40686 or to define LaTeX-commands.
40687 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
40688 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
40692 \begin_layout Standard
40693 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
40694 \begin_inset space ~
40698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40700 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
40707 \begin_layout Chapter
40713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40715 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40720 \begin_inset Index idx
40723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40732 \begin_layout Standard
40733 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
40735 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40739 It has the following submenus.
40742 \begin_layout Section
40746 \begin_layout Subsection
40750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40751 User Interface File
40752 \begin_inset Index idx
40755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40756 Customization ! of toolbars
40762 \begin_inset Index idx
40765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40766 Customization ! of menus
40774 \begin_layout Standard
40775 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
40776 interface (ui) file.
40777 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
40778 The toolbar buttons and menu entries are specified in the files
40787 Both files are loaded by the
40792 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these
40793 files and edit the entries.
40796 \begin_layout Standard
40797 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: The
40809 entries must be finished with an explicit
40834 and in the case of the
40835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40847 The syntax for the entries is:
40850 \begin_layout Standard
40851 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
40857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40879 \begin_layout Standard
40881 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
40884 All LyX-functions are listed in the menu
40886 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40888 \begin_inset space ~
40896 \begin_layout Standard
40897 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
40903 \begin_layout Standard
40904 An example: Assuming you use the menu
40906 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40909 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
40913 \begin_layout Standard
40914 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
40920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40938 \begin_layout Standard
40940 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
40944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40951 menu in the .inc-file to have the sixth bookmark.
40954 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40958 \begin_layout Standard
40959 Here you can change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
40960 The currently available icon sets are compared in
40961 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40964 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
40971 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40975 \begin_layout Standard
40978 Enable tool tips in main work area
40980 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
40984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40988 \begin_layout Standard
40991 Restore window layouts and geometries
40993 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
40994 in the last LyX session.
40997 \begin_layout Standard
41000 Restore cursor positions
41002 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
41006 \begin_layout Standard
41009 Load opened files from last session
41011 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
41014 \begin_layout Standard
41017 Clear all session information
41019 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
41020 of last opened documents, etc.).
41023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41027 name "sub:Backup documents"
41032 \begin_inset Index idx
41035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41044 \begin_layout Standard
41047 Backup original documents when saving
41049 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
41050 it was saved the last time.
41051 It is stored in the same folder as your document or in the
41054 \begin_inset space ~
41060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41062 reference "sec:Paths"
41067 The backup file has the file extension
41068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41082 \begin_layout Standard
41085 Backup documents, every
41087 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
41090 \begin_layout Standard
41093 Save documents compressed by default
41095 saves the files always in a compressed format.
41098 \begin_layout Standard
41103 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
41106 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41108 \begin_inset space ~
41116 \begin_layout Standard
41119 Open documents in tabs
41121 is not used, then every file will be opened in its own new instance of
41125 \begin_layout Standard
41130 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
41134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41142 reference "sec:Paths"
41146 for information about LyXServer pipes.
41152 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
41154 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
41157 \begin_layout Standard
41160 Single close-tab button
41162 there will only be one button (
41165 \begin_inset Graphics
41166 filename ../images/closetab.png
41173 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
41174 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
41177 \begin_layout Standard
41178 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41186 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
41194 \begin_layout Subsection
41196 \begin_inset Index idx
41199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41208 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
41215 \begin_layout Standard
41216 These fonts are used to display your documents on the screen.
41219 \begin_layout Standard
41220 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41228 This section only deals with the fonts
41233 The fonts that appear on the output are independent from these fonts, and
41236 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41237 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41248 \begin_layout Standard
41249 By default, LyX uses
41253 as roman (serif) font,
41261 (depends on the system) as
41264 \begin_inset space ~
41280 \begin_layout Standard
41281 You can change the font size with the
41288 \begin_layout Standard
41293 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
41295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41298 points have the size of 1
41299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41309 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
41314 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
41315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41319 The sizes are explained in detail in section
41320 \begin_inset space ~
41324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41326 reference "sub:Document-Font"
41333 \begin_layout Standard
41336 Use Pixmap Cache to speed up font rendering
41338 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
41339 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
41340 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
41341 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
41343 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41350 \begin_layout Subsection
41352 \begin_inset Index idx
41355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41362 \begin_inset Index idx
41365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41374 \begin_layout Standard
41375 Here you can change all the colors used by LyX.
41376 Choose an item in the list and use the
41383 \begin_layout Standard
41384 By using the option
41388 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
41391 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41401 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
41404 \begin_layout Subsection
41406 \begin_inset Index idx
41409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41418 \begin_layout Standard
41419 Here you can specify if graphics inside LyX are displayed.
41422 \begin_layout Standard
41427 enables previewing snippets of your document.
41428 This feature is described in section
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41435 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41442 \begin_layout Standard
41446 \begin_inset space ~
41450 \begin_inset space ~
41454 \begin_inset space ~
41459 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
41462 \begin_layout Section
41464 \begin_inset Index idx
41467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41476 \begin_layout Subsection
41480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41484 \begin_layout Standard
41487 Cursor follows scrollbar
41489 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
41493 \begin_layout Standard
41494 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
41495 If you set the value to zero the thickness of the cursor scales relative
41496 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
41499 \begin_layout Standard
41502 Scroll below end of document
41504 is self-explanatory.
41507 \begin_layout Standard
41508 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
41515 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
41517 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
41518 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
41521 \begin_layout Standard
41524 Sort environments alphabetically
41526 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
41529 \begin_layout Standard
41532 Group environments by their category
41534 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
41537 \begin_layout Standard
41538 The math macro editing option determines the editing style, see the section
41550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41554 \begin_layout Standard
41555 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
41560 specifies the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
41561 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
41565 \begin_layout Subsection
41567 \begin_inset Index idx
41570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41577 \begin_inset Index idx
41580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41581 Settings ! Shortcuts
41589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41593 \begin_layout Standard
41594 Bindings are used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
41595 Several binding files are available:
41598 \begin_layout Description
41599 cua.bind typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
41602 \begin_layout Description
41603 (x)emacs.bind set of bindings like they are used in the editor programs
41614 \begin_layout Description
41615 mac.bind set of bindings for
41618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41626 \begin_layout Standard
41627 There are also bind-files designed for special document classes, like
41631 , and bind files for special languages.
41632 The names of language bind-files begin with a language code, e.
41633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41637 \begin_inset space \space{}
41641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41649 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
41653 \begin_layout Standard
41654 Some bind-files, like
41658 , have only a small scope.
41659 When looking at the end of the file
41663 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
41666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41670 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
41675 \begin_inset Index idx
41678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41679 Key Bindings ! Editing
41687 \begin_layout Standard
41688 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
41689 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
41690 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
41693 Show key-bindings containing
41696 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
41697 Insert there for example as keyword
41698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41705 and you get the 4 different existing shortcuts for the 3 different functions
41707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41715 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
41716 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
41720 that you will find in the
41727 \begin_layout Standard
41729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41733 \begin_inset space \space{}
41744 , select the function and press the
41749 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
41750 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
41751 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
41752 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by modifying an existing
41753 binding and adding the different function names as a semicolon separated
41755 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
41757 The binding for the function
41761 is an example of this.
41764 \begin_layout Standard
41765 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying bind-files with a
41767 The syntax of the entries is:
41770 \begin_layout Standard
41776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41794 \begin_layout Subsection
41796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41798 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
41803 \begin_inset Index idx
41806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41813 \begin_inset Index idx
41816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41817 Settings ! Keyboard Map
41825 \begin_layout Standard
41826 Normally keyboard settings have to be done in a menu of your operating system.
41827 For the case that this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
41829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41833 \begin_inset space \space{}
41836 a Czech keyboard but want to write with it like with a Romanian one, you
41837 can use the keyboard map file named
41844 \begin_layout Standard
41845 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41853 Keyboard maps are only provided as makeshift and don't work on all systems.
41861 \begin_layout Standard
41862 You can furthermore specify here the
41864 Wheel scrolling speed
41867 The standard value is 1.0, higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
41871 \begin_layout Standard
41876 you can select a key for zooming.
41877 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
41880 \begin_layout Subsection
41884 \begin_layout Standard
41885 Input completion is described in sec.
41886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41892 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
41899 \begin_layout Section
41901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41908 \begin_inset Index idx
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41918 \begin_inset Index idx
41921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41930 \begin_layout Description
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41935 directory This is LyX's working directory.
41936 It is the default when you
41947 \begin_inset space ~
41955 \begin_layout Description
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41960 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
41962 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41964 \begin_inset space ~
41968 \begin_inset space ~
41976 \begin_layout Description
41978 \begin_inset space ~
41981 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
41987 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41991 \begin_inset Newline newline
41995 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42007 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
42015 \begin_layout Description
42017 \begin_inset space ~
42021 \begin_inset Index idx
42024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42030 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
42031 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
42032 \begin_inset space ~
42036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42038 reference "sub:Backup documents"
42046 will be used to save the backups.
42047 \begin_inset Newline newline
42050 Backup files have the ending
42051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42061 \begin_layout Description
42066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42077 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
42078 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
42079 \begin_inset Newline newline
42086 You add a BibTeX-database
42091 You can edit this file with the program
42100 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
42103 \begin_inset space ~
42109 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
42114 and click on the LyX-symbol.
42115 The entry will now be inserted as citation at the current cursor position
42121 and LyX need of course to be run the same time.
42122 \begin_inset Newline newline
42125 The pipe is also used for the
42130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42136 reference "sub:Backup documents"
42141 \begin_inset Newline newline
42144 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
42145 \begin_inset Newline newline
42161 \begin_layout Description
42163 \begin_inset space ~
42166 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
42169 \begin_layout Description
42171 \begin_inset space ~
42174 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
42175 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does otherwise not work or
42176 if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
42179 \begin_layout Description
42181 \begin_inset space ~
42184 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
42190 You only need to specify it if you are using
42194 and spell checking does otherwise not work or if you want to use custom/alterna
42200 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
42204 \begin_layout Description
42206 \begin_inset space ~
42209 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
42210 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list where
42211 to find it on the system.
42212 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
42213 is configured, so that you normally don't have to modify it.
42215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42222 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
42223 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
42226 \begin_layout Description
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42231 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows to use external files which
42232 are included to a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the document
42234 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
42236 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
42237 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
42238 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
42239 scanned for the input files.
42240 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
42241 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
42242 It is recommended to include always '.' as one of the paths, otherwise compilati
42243 on may fail for some documents.
42246 \begin_layout Section
42250 \begin_layout Standard
42251 Here you can insert your name and email address.
42252 The identity will be used when you have enabled change tracking as described
42254 \begin_inset space ~
42258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42260 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42264 , to mark changes you make as yours.
42267 \begin_layout Section
42269 \begin_inset Index idx
42272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42273 Language ! Settings
42279 \begin_inset Index idx
42282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42283 Settings ! Language
42291 \begin_layout Subsection
42293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42295 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
42302 \begin_layout Description
42304 \begin_inset space ~
42308 \begin_inset space ~
42311 language Here you can select the language of LyX's menus.
42312 You find the actual translation status here:
42313 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42315 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
42322 \begin_layout Description
42324 \begin_inset space ~
42327 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
42329 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
42330 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
42331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42347 The most widespread language package is
42352 \begin_inset Index idx
42355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42356 LaTeX-packages ! babel
42361 , it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
42362 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
42363 alternative language package
42368 \begin_inset Index idx
42371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42372 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
42377 that is more suited for the multi-script support of these engines.
42378 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
42380 The available selections are described in sec.
42381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42387 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
42394 \begin_layout Description
42396 \begin_inset space ~
42399 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
42400 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
42401 An example is the start command
42407 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
42412 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42427 selectlanguage{$$lang}
42432 \begin_layout Description
42434 \begin_inset space ~
42442 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
42443 command toggles the package on and off.
42446 \begin_layout Description
42448 \begin_inset space ~
42452 \begin_inset space ~
42455 Point Define the default decimal point for the use in tables (decimal point
42459 \begin_layout Description
42461 \begin_inset space ~
42465 \begin_inset space ~
42468 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
42469 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
42470 used by all LaTeX-packages.
42471 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
42478 \begin_layout Description
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42483 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
42485 When this option is not set, the
42488 \begin_inset space ~
42493 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
42494 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
42497 \begin_inset space ~
42505 \begin_layout Description
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42513 \begin_inset space ~
42519 When it is not set, the
42522 \begin_inset space ~
42527 is set to the end of the document.
42530 \begin_layout Description
42532 \begin_inset space ~
42536 \begin_inset space ~
42539 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
42540 language will be underlined in blue.
42543 \begin_layout Description
42545 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_inset space ~
42552 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
42553 like Arabic, Hebrew, Farsi.
42556 \begin_layout Description
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42561 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
42562 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
42563 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
42564 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
42567 \begin_layout Subsection
42571 \begin_layout Standard
42572 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
42573 \begin_inset space ~
42577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42579 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42586 \begin_layout Section
42590 \begin_layout Subsection
42594 \begin_layout Description
42596 \begin_inset space ~
42600 \begin_inset space ~
42603 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
42606 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42607 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42615 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
42618 \begin_layout Description
42620 \begin_inset space ~
42624 \begin_inset Index idx
42627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42634 \begin_inset Index idx
42637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42638 Settings ! Date format
42643 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
42644 \begin_inset Newline newline
42648 \begin_inset Flex URL
42651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42653 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
42659 \begin_inset Newline newline
42662 For example the format
42663 \begin_inset Newline newline
42667 \begin_inset Newline newline
42670 prints the date as day/month/year.
42673 \begin_layout Description
42675 \begin_inset space ~
42679 \begin_inset space ~
42682 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
42685 \begin_layout Description
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42690 search Commands that will be used for the menu
42692 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42694 \begin_inset space ~
42700 For a detailed description see section
42702 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42707 \begin_inset space ~
42715 \begin_layout Subsection
42717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42724 \begin_inset Index idx
42727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42734 \begin_inset Index idx
42737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42746 \begin_layout Description
42748 \begin_inset space ~
42751 printer Here you can specify the name of your default printer.
42752 The name will be used when the
42757 \begin_inset Newline newline
42761 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
42777 \begin_layout Description
42779 \begin_inset space ~
42782 command is the command LyX
42783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42790 LaTeX uses for printing.
42798 \begin_layout Description
42800 \begin_inset space ~
42804 \begin_inset space ~
42807 Options Here you can specify printer options.
42808 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
42809 of the program that provides the
42816 \begin_layout Description
42818 \begin_inset space ~
42822 \begin_inset space ~
42826 \begin_inset space ~
42829 printer This option works only for the
42834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42846 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
42847 This is an option only for dvips experts.
42850 \begin_layout Subsection
42855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42865 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
42870 \begin_inset Index idx
42873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42882 \begin_layout Description
42884 \begin_inset space ~
42891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42899 \begin_inset space ~
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42906 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
42911 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
42932 are used for Cyrillic.
42933 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
42934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42946 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
42947 LyX sets up in the background.
42948 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
42951 \begin_layout Description
42953 \begin_inset space ~
42957 \begin_inset space ~
42960 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
42965 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
42968 \begin_layout Description
42970 \begin_inset space ~
42974 \begin_inset space ~
42978 \begin_inset space ~
42982 \begin_inset space ~
42985 options They only have an effect when the program
42989 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
42992 \begin_layout Standard
42993 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
42994 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
42995 manuals of the applications.
42998 \begin_layout Description
43000 \begin_inset space ~
43003 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
43004 \begin_inset space ~
43008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43010 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
43017 \begin_layout Description
43019 \begin_inset space ~
43022 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
43023 \begin_inset space ~
43027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43029 reference "sub:Index-Program"
43036 \begin_layout Description
43038 \begin_inset space ~
43041 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
43042 \begin_inset space ~
43046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43048 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
43055 \begin_layout Description
43060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43068 \begin_inset space ~
43071 command Command for the program
43075 that is described in the section
43081 Additional Features
43086 \begin_layout Standard
43087 There are additionally the following options:
43090 \begin_layout Description
43092 \begin_inset space ~
43096 \begin_inset space ~
43100 \begin_inset space ~
43104 \begin_inset space ~
43108 \begin_inset space ~
43111 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
43112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43129 to separate folders.
43130 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
43131 \begin_inset Index idx
43134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43141 \begin_inset Index idx
43144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43153 \begin_layout Description
43155 \begin_inset space ~
43159 \begin_inset space ~
43163 \begin_inset space ~
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43171 \begin_inset space ~
43175 \begin_inset space ~
43178 changes Removes all manually set document class options in the
43180 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43183 dialog when changing the document class.
43186 \begin_layout Section
43188 \begin_inset space ~
43192 \begin_inset Index idx
43195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43204 \begin_layout Subsection
43206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43208 name "sub:Converters"
43213 \begin_inset Index idx
43216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43225 \begin_layout Standard
43226 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
43227 from one format to another.
43228 You can modify converters or create new ones.
43229 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the field
43236 \begin_inset space ~
43246 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
43250 \begin_inset space ~
43255 drop-down list, modify the
43259 field and press the
43266 \begin_layout Standard
43269 Converter File Cache
43271 is enabled, conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
43274 Maximum Age (in days
43277 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
43278 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
43281 \begin_layout Standard
43282 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
43283 definition, is described in the section
43294 \begin_layout Subsection
43296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43298 name "sec:File-Formats"
43303 \begin_inset Index idx
43306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43313 \begin_inset Index idx
43316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43325 \begin_layout Standard
43326 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
43327 You can modify the viewer and editor program that should be used for certain
43331 \begin_layout Standard
43332 Furthermore, you can define the
43334 Default output format
43336 that is used when you use
43338 View, Update, View Master Document
43342 Update Master Document
43348 menu or the toolbar.
43351 \begin_layout Standard
43352 More about formats and their options is described in the section
43363 \begin_layout Standard
43364 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
43365 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
43366 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
43367 This is done by specifying a
43372 More about this is described in the section
43383 \begin_layout Chapter
43384 Units available in LyX
43385 \begin_inset Index idx
43388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43397 name "chap:Units-available-in"
43404 \begin_layout Standard
43405 To understand the units described in this documentation,
43406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43408 reference "tab:Units"
43412 explains all units available in LyX.
43415 \begin_layout Standard
43416 \begin_inset Float table
43422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43423 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43441 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43449 \begin_inset Tabular
43450 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
43451 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
43452 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
43453 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
43455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43604 scaled point (65536
43605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43665 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
43669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43720 % of original image width
43727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43913 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43934 \begin_layout Chapter
43936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43938 name "chap:Credits"
43945 \begin_layout Standard
43946 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
43947 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
43950 \begin_layout Itemize
43953 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
43956 \begin_layout Itemize
43962 \begin_layout Itemize
43968 \begin_layout Itemize
43974 \begin_layout Itemize
43980 \begin_layout Itemize
43986 \begin_layout Itemize
43992 \begin_layout Itemize
43998 \begin_layout Itemize
44001 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
44004 \begin_layout Itemize
44010 \begin_layout Itemize
44016 \begin_layout Itemize
44022 \begin_layout Itemize
44028 \begin_layout Itemize
44034 \begin_layout Itemize
44040 \begin_layout Itemize
44046 \begin_layout Itemize
44052 \begin_layout Itemize
44054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44063 \begin_layout Standard
44064 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
44067 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
44074 \begin_layout Bibliography
44075 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44076 LatexCommand bibitem
44083 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44086 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
44091 \begin_inset Newline newline
44095 \begin_inset Flex URL
44098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44100 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
44108 \begin_layout Bibliography
44109 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44110 LatexCommand bibitem
44111 key "latexcompanion"
44115 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
44117 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
44120 Addison-Wesley, 2004
44123 \begin_layout Bibliography
44124 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44125 LatexCommand bibitem
44130 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
44133 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
44136 Addison-Wesley, 2003
44139 \begin_layout Bibliography
44140 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44141 LatexCommand bibitem
44148 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
44151 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
44154 \begin_layout Bibliography
44155 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44156 LatexCommand bibitem
44168 Addison-Wesley, 1984
44171 \begin_layout Bibliography
44172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44173 LatexCommand bibitem
44179 \begin_inset Newline newline
44183 \begin_inset Flex URL
44186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44188 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
44196 \begin_layout Bibliography
44197 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44198 LatexCommand bibitem
44204 \begin_inset Newline newline
44208 \begin_inset Flex URL
44211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44213 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
44221 \begin_layout Bibliography
44222 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44223 LatexCommand bibitem
44229 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44231 name "Documentation"
44232 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
44241 \begin_inset Newline newline
44245 \begin_inset Flex URL
44248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44250 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
44258 \begin_layout Bibliography
44259 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44260 LatexCommand bibitem
44266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44268 name "Documentation"
44269 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
44273 how to use the program
44278 \begin_inset Newline newline
44282 \begin_inset Flex URL
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44287 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
44295 \begin_layout Bibliography
44296 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44297 LatexCommand bibitem
44303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44305 name "Documentation"
44306 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
44315 \begin_inset Newline newline
44319 \begin_inset Flex URL
44322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44324 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
44332 \begin_layout Bibliography
44333 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44334 LatexCommand bibitem
44340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44342 name "Documentation"
44343 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
44352 \begin_inset Newline newline
44356 \begin_inset Flex URL
44359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44361 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
44369 \begin_layout Bibliography
44370 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44371 LatexCommand bibitem
44377 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44379 name "Documentation"
44380 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf"
44384 of the LaTeX-package
44389 \begin_inset Index idx
44392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44393 LaTeX-packages ! caption
44399 \begin_inset Newline newline
44403 \begin_inset Flex URL
44406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44408 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption.pdf
44416 \begin_layout Bibliography
44417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44418 LatexCommand bibitem
44424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44426 name "Documentation"
44427 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
44431 of the LaTeX-package
44436 \begin_inset Index idx
44439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44440 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
44446 \begin_inset Newline newline
44450 \begin_inset Flex URL
44453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44455 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
44463 \begin_layout Bibliography
44464 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44465 LatexCommand bibitem
44471 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44473 name "Documentation"
44474 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
44478 of the LaTeX-package
44483 \begin_inset Index idx
44486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44487 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
44493 \begin_inset Newline newline
44497 \begin_inset Flex URL
44500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44502 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
44510 \begin_layout Bibliography
44511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44512 LatexCommand bibitem
44518 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44520 name "Documentation"
44521 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf"
44525 of the LaTeX-package
44530 \begin_inset Index idx
44533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44534 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
44540 \begin_inset Newline newline
44544 \begin_inset Flex URL
44547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44549 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf
44557 \begin_layout Bibliography
44558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44559 LatexCommand bibitem
44565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44567 name "Documentation"
44568 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
44572 of the LaTeX-package
44577 \begin_inset Index idx
44580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44581 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
44587 \begin_inset Newline newline
44591 \begin_inset Flex URL
44594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44596 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
44604 \begin_layout Bibliography
44605 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44606 LatexCommand bibitem
44612 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44614 name "Documentation"
44615 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
44619 of the LaTeX-package
44624 \begin_inset Index idx
44627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44628 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
44634 \begin_inset Newline newline
44638 \begin_inset Flex URL
44641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44643 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
44651 \begin_layout Bibliography
44652 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44653 LatexCommand bibitem
44659 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44661 name "Documentation"
44662 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
44666 of the LaTeX-package
44671 \begin_inset Index idx
44674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44675 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
44681 \begin_inset Newline newline
44685 \begin_inset Flex URL
44688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44690 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
44698 \begin_layout Bibliography
44699 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44700 LatexCommand bibitem
44706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44708 name "Documentation"
44709 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf"
44713 of the LaTeX-package
44718 \begin_inset Index idx
44721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44722 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
44728 \begin_inset Newline newline
44732 \begin_inset Flex URL
44735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44737 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf
44745 \begin_layout Bibliography
44746 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44747 LatexCommand bibitem
44753 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44756 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
44760 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
44761 \begin_inset Newline newline
44765 \begin_inset Flex URL
44768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44770 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
44778 \begin_layout Bibliography
44779 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44780 LatexCommand bibitem
44786 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44789 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
44793 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
44794 \begin_inset Newline newline
44798 \begin_inset Flex URL
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44803 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
44811 \begin_layout Bibliography
44812 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44813 LatexCommand bibitem
44819 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44822 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
44826 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
44827 \begin_inset Newline newline
44831 \begin_inset Flex URL
44834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44836 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
44844 \begin_layout Bibliography
44845 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44846 LatexCommand bibitem
44852 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44855 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
44859 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
44860 \begin_inset Newline newline
44864 \begin_inset Flex URL
44867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44869 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
44877 \begin_layout Bibliography
44878 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44879 LatexCommand bibitem
44885 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44888 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
44892 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
44893 \begin_inset Newline newline
44897 \begin_inset Flex URL
44900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44902 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
44910 \begin_layout Bibliography
44911 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44912 LatexCommand bibitem
44918 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44921 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
44925 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
44926 \begin_inset Newline newline
44930 \begin_inset Flex URL
44933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44935 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
44943 \begin_layout Bibliography
44944 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44945 LatexCommand bibitem
44951 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44954 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
44958 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
44959 \begin_inset Newline newline
44963 \begin_inset Flex URL
44966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44968 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
44976 \begin_layout Bibliography
44977 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44978 LatexCommand bibitem
44984 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44987 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
44991 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
44992 \begin_inset Newline newline
44996 \begin_inset Flex URL
44999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45001 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
45009 \begin_layout Bibliography
45010 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45011 LatexCommand bibitem
45017 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45020 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
45024 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
45025 \begin_inset Newline newline
45029 \begin_inset Flex URL
45032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45034 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
45042 \begin_layout Bibliography
45043 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45044 LatexCommand bibitem
45050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45053 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
45057 about new features in
45062 \begin_inset Newline newline
45066 \begin_inset Flex URL
45069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45071 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
45079 \begin_layout Standard
45080 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45114 \begin_inset Note Note
45117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45124 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
45125 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
45126 bibliography is the second one:
45134 \begin_layout Standard
45135 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
45136 LatexCommand bibtex
45137 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
45138 options "biblio/alphadin"
45145 \begin_layout Standard
45146 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
45149 \begin_layout Standard
45150 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
45151 LatexCommand printnomenclature
45157 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
45158 LatexCommand printindex